Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW X3 2024-2025
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Dashboard
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Safety switch 98
Power windows 95
Unlocking
Locking
2
6
7
Ventilation 279
Seating comfort features
Memory function 111
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 108
Opening and closing cargo area
83
5
Buttons for the central locking system 91
8
Turn signal lever and light
32
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Exterior lighting menu 155
Audio, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Automatic High Beam Assistant
153
Voice control, BMW Intelligent
Personal Assistant 56
Low-beam headlights 156
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Driving lights automatic 156
Adaptive lighting functions 159
Exterior lighting off 156
Turn signal 152
Selection of configuration menus
for instrument cluster and Head-
up display 47
Using selection lists 141
Accessing and resetting trip data
146
High-beam headlights, head-
light flasher 152
Resetting the G-Meter values
148
9
Shift paddle, right and left 124
Sport Boost function 126
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Turn speed control systems on/off
13 Wiper lever
Wipers 161
213
Rain sensor 162
Select speed control system 213
Cleaning the windshield 163
Rear wiper 164
Store speed 213
Adjusting the speed 213
Clean the rear window 164
11 Instrument cluster 47
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Settings, instrument cluster 47
14
Horn, entire surface
Settings for Head-up display 133
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 110
16 Unlocking the hood
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1
Control display 49
Hazard warning system 380
Adjusting the volume
Station/title forward
Station/title back
2
Defrost function 277
Rear window defroster 278
6
7
My Modes 127
3
4
5
Ventilation 279
Controller with buttons 54
Parking assistance systems 238
Vehicle settings menu 55
Operating elements for entertainment sys-
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
8
9
Automatic Hold 131
Parking brake 129
Selector lever 121
34
Dashboard
CONTROLS
10
Turning drive-ready state on/off
119
In the vicinity of the headliner
1
Emergency Call, SOS 382
5
6
7
Interior lights 159
2
3
Camera
Interior camera 291
Reading lights 160
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag 168
Interior lighting menu 55
4
Glass sunroof 98
35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
Front camera
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Camera behind the windshield
Camera behind the windshield.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
Front radar sensor.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
36
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In tight curves.
Top view cameras
When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
With open doors or open cargo area.
When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., setting sun.
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
Rearview camera
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The rearview camera is located above the li-
cense-plate carrier.
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
For the cameras to function correctly, the area
around the cameras must be clean and free.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.
System limits of the cameras
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Front radar sensor
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
For the radar sensors to function correctly, the
area around the radar sensors must be kept
clean and free.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors may be re-
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-
lowing situations:
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator
grille.
Radar sensors, side, front
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.
In case of iced-up sensors.
If sensors are covered such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
The radar sensors are located on the side of
the front bumper.
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Radar sensors, side, rear
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
The radar sensors are located on the side of
the rear bumper.
38
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors
For the ultrasonic sensors to function correctly,
the area around the ultrasonic sensors must
be kept clean and free.
Ultrasonic sensors, front
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 388.
Vehicle care, refer to page 389.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷
▷
▷
For small children and animals.
For people with specific clothing, e.g., coat.
With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷
In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
For elevated, protruding objects, e.g., wall
ledges.
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the sides of the
front and rear bumpers.
39
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
In the case objects with fine surfaces or
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.
▷
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.
With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.
Low objects, e.g., curbs, that have already
been displayed may enter the blind area of
the sensors.
▷
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.
In automatic car washes.
For bumps, e.g., speed bumps.
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
▷
When the trailer hitch cover is not on
straight.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
40
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Operating ele-
ment
Function
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Start/Stop button for
turning on standby state
or drive-ready state.
Volume button for ac-
tivating sleep mode
or turning on standby
state.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle will be
in one of three operating states:
Idle state
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.
Principle
Standby state.
Drive-ready state.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
The vehicle is in idle state until it is opened
from the outside or after it is exited and locked.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
The operating elements for manually setting
the operating state are located at the bottom
of the center console.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
41
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
To activate/deactivate this function, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock/
unlock" / "Turn off after opening door".
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Establishing the sleep mode
manually
To turn on sleep mode man-
ually, push and hold the volume
button on the center console un-
til all displays go out.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Deep sleep mode
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Principle
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-
hicle is stationary for several-week periods.
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are
limited to the essentials.
Establishing the sleep mode
automatically
The vehicle switches automatically to idle state
in situations like the following:
General information
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, some special measures are nec-
essary. For more information, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Activating/deactivating deep sleep
mode
1. To enable deep sleep mode, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Deep sleep
mode".
Depending on the settings configured via
iDrive, when one or both front doors are
opened when exiting the vehicle after a
drive.
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low-beam headlights are switched
on.
2. Select the desired setting.
42
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Deep sleep mode deactivates automatically
when drive-ready state is turned on.
Using the Start/Stop button
To manually turn on standby state
again with the Start/Stop button, push
the Start/Stop button on the center
console. The control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
Access to the vehicle
Display in the instrument cluster
If OFF is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster, drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state is
turned on.
Press the button on the cargo area to access
the vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep
sleep mode remains on in this case.
Drive-ready state
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
Standby state
Principle
If standby state is activated, most functions
can be used while the vehicle is stationary. De-
sired settings can be applied.
General information
Some vehicle functions can only be used with
the drive-ready state switched on.
The vehicle is in standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
Safety information
Turning on standby state manually
DANGER
General information
Standby state can be reactivated manually if
the vehicle has been set to idle state automati-
cally.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
Via the volume button
To manually turn on standby
state again using the volume
button on the center console,
push the volume button. The
control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
43
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Warning
Turning on the drive-ready state
To turn on drive-ready state, proceed as fol-
lows:
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. On the center console, press the Start/Stop
button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-
ent lengths of time.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Gasoline engine
The full drive power may not be available after
the gasoline engine is started. This can take
up to 30 seconds, depending on the engine.
In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as
usual.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Additional information:
NOTICE
Power gauge, refer to page 143.
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-
cession.
Display in the instrument cluster
If READY is displayed in the in-
strument cluster, the Auto Start/
Stop function is ready to start
the engine automatically.
Information on the other displays on the instru-
ment cluster is provided in the “Displays” sec-
tion.
Turning on the drive-ready state
Additional information:
Instrument cluster, refer to page 47.
General information
Drive-ready state is turned on/off us-
ing the Start/Stop button on the center
console.
Turning off drive-ready state
1. When the vehicle is stationary, press the
brake.
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button on the center
console.
44
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
tone sounds.
The drive-ready state is switched off automat-
ically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled
when the driver's door is opened.
45
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Input and display
Entering letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered, e.g.,
when inputting destinations.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment.
Display and operating
concept
Icon
Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and operat-
ing concept and includes a wide range of func-
tions. Using BMW iDrive, you can input letters
and characters when entering a destination or
activate or deactivate functions.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
Confirm entry.
Tap icon: delete a letter or a
number.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.
Via the Controller.
Press and hold the icon: delete
all letters or numbers.
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Using the operating elements in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Entry comparison
Instrument cluster, refer to page 47.
When entering data from a database such as
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
ters being added as necessary.
Safety information
Warning
Activating/deactivating the functions
Some menu items are preceded by an icon. To
activate or deactivate the function, select the
menu item.
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
46
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Icon
Meaning
Instrument cluster
Function is activated.
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperature as well as indicator and warning
lights.
Function is deactivated.
Functions can be activated or
deactivated using the button
on the control display. If the
button is highlighted in color,
the function is activated.
The buttons on the steering wheel can be
used to configure the layout of the instrument
cluster and the contents of the central display
area, e.g., trip data. Additional views can be
set on the control display, e.g., a second actual
speed.
BMW Curved Display
Safety information
Principle
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
display in the instrument panel that is curved
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-
er's side and the control display.
Warning
If the driving information displays on the in-
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.
Turning drive-ready state off and on again
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 391.
Overview
Overview
1
Instrument cluster 47
Control display 49
2
Instrument cluster.
47
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 135.
Display ranges on the instrument
cluster
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Operating Function
element
Display the menu bar on the in-
strument cluster.
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-
tion up or down.
1
Speedometer
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
2
Driver assistance systems 211
Parking assistance systems 238
Driver Attention Camera 205
Check Control 135
3
4
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Selector lever display 121
Gear shift indicator 142
Selection lists 141
Configuring the layout
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode.
Efficiency trainer 324
Power gauge 143
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in
the instrument cluster can be individually con-
figured and displayed.
5
Tachometer 144
6
7
Engine temperature 144
Outside temperature 145
Central display range 145
Shift lights 145
1.
Press the Settings button on the
steering wheel.
8
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
9
My Modes drive mode 127
10 Speed Limit Info 211
Speed Limit Assistant 234
11 Time 148
2. "LAYOUT"
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
12 Fuel gauge 149
Range 149
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
The positions of some displays may vary,
e.g., the selector lever display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Additional information:
48
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Settings
Warning
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
Objects in the area in front of a display can
slip and damage the display. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not
place objects in the area in front of a display.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Instrument
cluster"
2. Select the desired setting.
Overview
Control display
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
The control display switches on automatically
when it is needed for operation or when the
vehicle is unlocked.
The control display is located on the instru-
ment panel above the center console.
The control display can also be turned on/off
manually.
The main menu of BMW iDrive is divided into
different areas, e.g., menu bar, status informa-
tion, and widgets.
Buttons on the control display
When operating the control display, the but-
tons on the control display illuminate.
You can configure various settings such as the
brightness of the control display.
Button Function
Go to previous menu.
Safety information
Warning
Go to Media menu.
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Call up the Communication menu.
Go to Navigation menu.
Turning the control display on/off
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
49
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Main menu
The main menu can be opened from any
menu.
The control display can also be switched off
manually.
Climate menu
The Climate menu provides access to all
climate control functions.
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Apps menu
2. "Control display off"
The Apps menu provides access to all apps
and vehicle functions. You can use a filter to
make it easier to find a specific app. The last
selected filter is stored. To display the desired
app, change the filter as necessary.
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Main menu
General information
Apple CarPlay©
The main menu on the control display is div-
ided into different areas.
The Apple CarPlay menu is displayed in
the main menu depending on national-market
version and connected function. Apple CarPlay
enables the secure use of certain functions of a
compatible Apple iPhone via iDrive.
Overview
Android Auto©
The Android Auto menu is displayed in
the main menu, depending on national-market
version and associated function. Android Auto
enables the secure use of certain functions of a
compatible Android smartphone via iDrive.
1
Widgets
Widgets
2
3
4
5
Status information
Configuration bar for main display
Temperature setting
Menu bar
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as the navigation map.
Widgets also serve as buttons and allow you to
jump to the respective menu or most important
functions.
Menu bar
Main display
The main display shows real-time information
and dynamic content such as the navigation
map. This display also contains buttons and
lets you jump to the desired menu.
General information
The menu bar may not be displayed when us-
ing third-party apps. To display the menu bar
again, swipe up from the lower edge of the
control display or press a button.
50
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Status information
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
General information
Status information is displayed at the top of
the control display in the form of icons. De-
pending on the equipment and national-mar-
ket version, different icons are available.
Other status information
Icon Meaning
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Destination guidance active.
Go to quick access.
Telephone status information
Icon
Meaning
Active call.
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated.
Entertainment status information
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
Icon Meaning
USB audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
Connected Music with Spotify.
Time shift.
1.
Tap the main menu icon.
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right
side of the screen to the left.
3. Select the desired main display.
Quick access
Wi-Fi.
Certain functions and individual shortcuts can
be opened via quick access.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Function Operation
Satellite radio is switched on.
Show
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller up.
Tap the icon at the top of the
screen.
Swipe from top to bottom on the
Status information messages
Icon
Meaning
Number of notifications.
Check Control message.
Message.
Hide
Swipe from the bottom up on the
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller down.
51
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Deleting shortcuts
Shortcuts
1. To delete shortcuts, swipe from top to bot-
tom on the control display.
Principle
Shortcuts provide quick access to functions
such as those that are frequently used. Short-
cuts are opened via the quick link and can be
defined individually. The following functions,
for example, are defined as shortcuts:
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3.
Tap the icon for deleting the desired
shortcut.
Settings
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The radio stations.
The navigation destinations.
The phone numbers.
The jump-ins to menus.
The functions.
Setting the brightness
1. To adjust the brightness of the control dis-
play, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Cockpit
brightness" / "Brightness at night".
2. Select the desired setting.
Saving shortcuts
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
1. Press and hold the desired function.
2. "Add to shortcuts"
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
1. To enable/disable audio confirmation for
the control display, go through the menu as
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "System
settings" / "Sound".
Shortcuts can also be saved directly via the
quick link.
Selecting shortcuts
2. Select the desired setting.
1. To select shortcuts, swipe from top to bot-
tom on the control display.
System limits
2. Select the desired shortcut.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Sorting shortcuts
1. To sort shortcuts, swipe from top to bottom
on the control display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut and
move it to the desired position.
Operation via control display
Principle
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
52
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers, do
not use any objects.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
Function
Operation
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed
when the vehicle is stationary.
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
1. If necessary,
tap the icon.
2. Press and hold the widget.
Display menu.
Tap once.
3. The following adjustments can be made:
▷
Tap the add icon.
Using alphabetical lists
Contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
A new widget can be added below the
selected widget.
To navigate to a desired initial letter in a list of
more than 30 entries, select the letter on the
letter bar and scroll up or down.
▷
▷
Tap the delete icon.
The widget is deleted.
Tap the sort icon.
Favorites are displayed at the top of the list.
Entries with numbers are displayed at the end
of the list.
The widget can be moved to the desired
position.
Sorting apps
The order of apps can be adjusted in the Apps
menu.
Controller
Principle
1. Open the Apps menu.
The Controller can be used to select menu
items and enter the settings. The buttons can
be used to open the menus directly.
2. Press and hold the desired app icon and
move it to the desired position.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
Overview
To bring up the Context menu, press and hold
the desired menu item.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
▷
"General help": The Integrated Owner's
Manual opens.
▷
"Add to shortcuts": The menu item is de-
fined as a shortcut.
The Controller is located in the center console.
53
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Buttons on the Controller
Button
Function
Go to the main menu.
Go to the Media menu.
Go to the Phone menu.
Go to the Navigation menu.
Go to the previous menu.
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to
switch between menus, for example.
Operation
▷
Turn the Controller to switch between
menu options, for example.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Push the main menu button.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
option is highlighted.
▷
Push the Controller to select a menu option,
for example.
2. Press the Controller.
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
1.
Push the main menu button.
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the
main display.
54
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. Select the desired main display.
Deleting an entry
Icon Function
Selecting a widget
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
ber.
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-
sired widget is selected.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
3. Press the Controller.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
1. Select the desired menu option using the
Controller.
1. Quickly turn the Controller to the left or
right.
2. Press and hold the Controller.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
▷
"General help": The Integrated Owner's
Manual opens.
Direct access buttons
▷
"Add to shortcuts": The menu item is de-
fined as a shortcut.
Principle
Entering letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can only be entered
when stationary.
There are buttons for jumping directly to cer-
tain functions in the vehicle. These buttons
can be used to bring up the respective menu
directly on the control display. Then continue
operation via iDrive.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
Overview
The direct access buttons are located on the
center console, between the steering wheel
and driver’s door, and in the headliner.
2.
: confirm entry.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 58.
55
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
Button Function
The following functional requirements apply for
the Personal Assistant:
Go to the Drive Settings menu on
the center console.
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-
tween the steering wheel and driv-
er’s door.
▷
Download the corresponding language
package before using the Personal Assis-
tant for the first time.
Go to the Interior Lighting menu on
the headliner.
▷
Commands must always be spoken in the
selected system language.
For the full range of functions, you must acti-
vate or purchase the following functions:
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Online speech processing is enabled.
All settings under Data privacy are enabled.
The activation word is enabled.
Principle
Suggestions are activated.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions.
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
Corresponding ConnectedDrive services
are purchased in the ConnectedDrive Store.
The Personal Assistant provides proactive
suggestions to make it easier to operate the
vehicle. The Personal Assistant is available de-
pending on national-market version. The func-
tion scope and detection may vary depending
on national-market version.
▷
The BMW Digital Premium subscription has
been purchased.
Additional information:
▷
Setting the system language, refer to
page 58.
You can use supported voice assistants from
third parties in your vehicle after pairing your
smartphone.
▷
Online speech processing, refer to
page 58.
▷
▷
▷
Data protection, refer to page 66.
Activation word, refer to page 57.
Get suggestions, refer to page 58.
You can configure various settings such as the
suggestions from the Personal Assistant.
The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side.
Activating the voice control system
Using the voice activation system
›...‹: In the Owner's Manual, commands that
can be spoken are indicated by brackets.
General information
You can activate voice control as follows:
When saying commands, note the following:
▷
▷
Briefly press the microphone button
on the steering wheel.
Say the activation word.
▷
Say the commands at a normal volume.
Speaking directly into the microphone does
not improve voice recognition.
▷
Say the commands fluently and with nor-
mal volume, emphasis, and speed.
56
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
in addition to your preset activation word from
BMW.
Microphone button on steering wheel
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Voice control" / "Other assistants".
1.
To activate voice control with the
microphone button, briefly press the voice
control button on the steering wheel.
2. Select the desired setting.
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
Canceling voice control
You can cancel voice control as follows:
2. Say the desired command.
Activation word
Principle
▷
Press the voice control button on
the steering wheel again.
Saying the activation word will start the
Personal Assistant: ›Hello BMW‹. The micro-
phones on the driver's or front passenger's
side are active with the following voice control,
depending on where the activation word was
spoken.
▷
▷
▷
Say the following command: ›Cancel‹
Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Press the Controller.
Possible voice commands
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
Principle
Voice commands can be used to give instruc-
tions or ask questions, with the Personal As-
sistant providing assistance.
Enabling/disabling the activation word
The activation word can be enabled and disa-
bled.
It is possible, for example, to call contacts, nav-
igate to an address, change settings, or control
vehicle functions, e.g., air conditioning, by voice
command.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /
"General" / "Activation with voice control".
You can reach most content on the control dis-
play, e.g., menu items or lists, using spoken
commands.
Activation word from third-party providers
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
Help for voice control
You can say the following commands to get
help with voice control:
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
nected via Apple CarPlay.
▷
›Voice commands‹: Possible example com-
mands are announced.
Supported voice assistants can be used in the
vehicle after you have connected your smart-
phone.
▷
›General information on voice control‹: In-
formation on how voice control operates is
announced.
The activation word for voice assistants from
associated third-party providers can be used
▷
›Help‹: Tips and example commands for
voice control are announced.
57
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Sample commands
Managing language packages
The following voice commands serve as exam-
ples.
1. To manage language packages, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /
"Language".
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹
›Drive me to JFK airport‹
›Increase volume‹ or ›Decrease volume‹
›Activate the climate control‹
›What is my remaining range‹
›Sport mode‹
2. Select the desired setting.
Suggestions
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-
vidual suggestions. Suggestions can be ena-
bled or disabled. Suggestions can be custom-
ized, e.g., which categories suggestions are
based on or whether to emit a signal tone.
Additional example commands can be dis-
played on the control display.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Personal Assistant" / "Example
commands".
1. To configure the settings, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /
"Suggestions".
Sample commands are displayed in the BMW
Intelligent Personal Assistant widget.
2. Select the desired setting.
Menu items
Online speech processing
The Personal Assistant can open menu items
directly. Say the menu items as they are dis-
played on the control display. You do not have
to follow the order of the menu items when
speaking them out loud.
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
Online speech processing is not available in all
languages. Online voice processing can be de-
activated depending on national-market ver-
sion.
1. Activate voice control.
2. ›Media‹
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the
control display.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /
"General" / "Online speech processing".
Settings
Configuring the visualization
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can
be set.
Setting the system language
You must set a system language that is sup-
ported by the Personal Assistant. A language
package can be downloaded.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Personal Assistant" /
"Settings" / "General" / "Visualization".
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Language".
2. Select the desired setting.
2. Select the desired setting.
58
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Voice control from third-party
providers
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be activated by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Principle
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-
cle.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Voice control".
2. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
Functional requirements
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
1. To activate Amazon Alexa Car Integration,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Alexa".
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
2. Select the desired setting.
1.
Press and hold the voice control
button on the steering wheel for approx.
3 seconds.
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
System limits
2.
Press the voice control button on
the steering wheel to cancel the smart-
phone voice control.
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle. This also applies to
safety functions and systems.
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
59
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
The following information sources can also be
used:
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.
Driver’s Guide Web.
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Principle
Various connection modes are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and desired function.
Overview
General information
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and suitable connection modes for them.
The functions available depend on the vehicle
equipment and connected mobile device.
Detailed information on the functions and con-
nection modes is provided in the following me-
dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-
fied keyword:
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
Function
Connection mode
Icon
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.
tem.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a mobile device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Play music from a USB stick.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
USB port, refer to page 288.
60
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Icon
Function
Connection mode
Calling without a mobile phone.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: calling with the Personal
eSIM.
Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
Wi-Fi.
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and
via voice control.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Apple CarPlay.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
voice control.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Android Auto.
Charge USB device.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
USB port, refer to page 288.
Keyword: USB connection.
USB port, refer to page 288.
61
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
Vehicle features and options
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Functional requirements
The following requirements apply for Remote
Software Upgrade:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷
▷
The vehicle has mobile network reception.
Principle
Consent to send corresponding data has
been granted in the BMW Remote Software
Upgrade settings.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
Settings
To bring up the Remote Software Updates set-
tings, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote
Software Upgrade" / "Settings".
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Additional information:
Data protection, refer to page 66.
Safety information
Search for an upgrade
Warning
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Automatic search
The vehicle checks regularly for Remote Soft-
ware Upgrades in the background.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Manual search
1. To search manually for a Remote Software
Upgrade, go through the menu as follows:
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
Apps menu / "All" / "System settings" /
"Remote Software Upgrade" / "Search for
upgrade".
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication.
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Information about the version
Principle
Download of an upgrade
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No download consent is required.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Via My BMW App
If a Remote Software Upgrade is available, in-
formation about the new software version is
provided on the My BMW App.
Displaying information
Information on the Remote Software Upgrade
can be shown on the vehicle's control display
or viewed online in the ConnectedDrive cus-
tomer portal:
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
Data can then be sent from the mobile device
to the vehicle.
1. To display information in the vehicle,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote
Software Upgrade".
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
2.
▷
The currently installed version is dis-
played.
You do not need to be present in the vehicle to
download the data to a mobile device.
▷
Display new available version:
"Version info"
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW
App on your smartphone.
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
To view the information in the ConnectedDrive
customer portal, visit the following website:
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-
bile device to the vehicle both while driving
and when stopped. Depending on the size
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.
Installing the upgrade
What to know before upgrading
Before installing an upgrade, note the follow-
ing:
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Additional information:
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-
grade may result in the deletion of software
63
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
Preparing the vehicle
The vehicle must be prepared for the Remote
Software Upgrade as follows:
▷
The installation may be interrupted if there
are modifications to the vehicle's electrical
system, e.g., to control units, which were
not made by the vehicle manufacturer.
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷
Make sure that the vehicle has mobile net-
work reception so that a fault message can
be sent to the vehicle manufacturer, e.g., if
the installation is canceled.
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
The installation may take around 20 to
30 minutes.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.
Close the glass sunroof.
Close the cargo area.
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
Disconnect devices that consume power,
e.g., mobile phones.
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
▷
▷
Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
Prerequisites for the installation
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.
▷
▷
Turn off the exterior lighting.
▷
The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
Remove any devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
Install the upgrade immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all
prerequisites have been met.
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote
Software Upgrade" / "Let's get started".
Pay attention to any instructions given on the
control display regarding additional require-
ments.
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites
automatically. Observe the information on the
control display.
Installing an upgrade with the timer
Once the drive is complete, the timer can be
used to automatically install the upgrade at a
preset time, e.g., during the night. It may be
helpful to install the upgrade at a later time in
order to meet functional requirements, e.g., to
allow the engine to cool sufficiently.
If the requirements are not met, e.g., suffi-
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be
offered for installation.
If all prerequisites are met, you can also start
the upgrade installation via the My BMW App.
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "System settings" / "Remote
Software Upgrade".
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
2. Select the desired settings.
64
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
The installation starts automatically when:
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
Purchased services, e.g., Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services, are au-
tomatically reactivated the next time the vehi-
cle is driven.
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
If the vehicle has been stationary for some
time, it may be necessary to recharge the vehi-
cle battery by going for a long drive.
Installing via the My BMW App
Once all preparations are complete and all re-
quirements are met, the upgrade installation
can also be started using the My BMW App
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-
stallation can be started remotely. It is not nec-
essary to be present in the vehicle.
Malfunction
If the Remote Software Upgrade system may
not be operational, follow the instructions
given on the control display or My BMW App.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
It may be helpful to install the upgrade at a
later time so that all functional requirements
are met, e.g., to allow the engine to cool suffi-
ciently.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷
▷
Hazard warning flashers.
After a software update in the vehicle
Central locking system and Comfort Access,
as applicable.
After a vehicle software update, for example,
via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information, depending on the national-
market version.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking light.
Horn.
Alarm system.
Emergency call.
Before setting off, make sure that the
Integrated Owner's Manual is available and
up-to-date.
Power windows.
Glass sunroof.
Locking the tank flap.
Operating the tailgate or trunk lid.
Exit warning if needed.
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window
may no longer close completely.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
65
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
data is deleted, for example:
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Stored radio stations.
Stored shortcuts.
Additional information:
Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.
Data protection
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.
Office data, for instance voice memos.
Login accounts.
Data transfer
Digital key.
Principle
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
Drive customer portal so that remote functions
can no longer be used.
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When data transfer is deactivated,
the respective service cannot be used.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply
when deleting personal data in the vehicle:
Settings
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
▷
Data can only be deleted while the vehicle
is stationary.
1. To configure the settings, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Data
privacy".
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
2. Select the desired setting.
Personal data in the vehicle
Principle
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
Additional information:
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 66.
Depending on use, your vehicle stores per-
sonal data such as saved radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted us-
ing iDrive.
Reset vehicle data
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
66
Personal settings
CONTROLS
switched off. Individual settings can only be
deleted while the vehicle is stationary. The ve-
hicle key must be in the vehicle.
▷
▷
The vehicle must be stationary to create,
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are
only possible when the vehicle has cellular
network reception.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Reset vehicle
data" / "Reset".
If the synchronization of settings has been en-
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.
Welcome window
The welcome window appears on the control
display after the vehicle is unlocked. The type
of welcome depends on the following require-
ments:
BMW ID
▷
No BMW ID is saved to the vehicle:
Principle
The welcome is neutral. These profiles are
provided to use the vehicle without a BMW
ID. A new BMW ID can be added.
In BMW ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW
ID is the personal login for all relevant offers
from the BMW brand. The BMW ID can be
used to save personal vehicle settings to a
profile as well as to apply these settings.
▷
The vehicle key or digital key has not been
assigned to a BMW ID:
The welcome is neutral. Saved profiles are
shown for selection. A new BMW ID can be
added.
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs. If a ve-
hicle is used by several people, each person
can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. Addi-
tional profiles can be used to operate the vehi-
cle without a BMW ID, e.g., the guest profile.
▷
A BMW ID has been assigned to the vehicle
key or digital key:
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. Available profiles are
shown for selection. A new BMW ID can be
added.
The BMW ID must be registered once. Regis-
tration can be done on the My BMW App, in
the ConnectedDrive customer portal, or at an
authorized service center.
Automatic driver recognition can activate a
BMW ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must be
linked to the BMW ID.
Adding the BMW ID
1.
To add a BMW ID, tap the BMW ID icon
or profile picture on the status bar.
2.
▷
The guest profile is active:
"Guest" / "Add profile".
The driver profile is active:
"Log in with BMW ID".
Many saved settings can be synchronized with
the BMW Cloud. This makes these settings
available in any vehicle where the same BMW
ID is used to log in.
▷
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your
smartphone.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the BMW ID:
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-
phone.
If the My BMW App is installed on the
smartphone and the BMW ID saved to it,
67
Personal settings
CONTROLS
the BMW ID is automatically transferred to
the vehicle.
In rare cases, the use of My BMW app func-
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More
information is shown on the control display.
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a new
BMW ID can be registered.
Primary user
5. Change additional settings as necessary,
e.g., automatic driver recognition.
The primary user is the person who first adds
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the
vehicle to the My BMW app. Alternatively, the
primary user can be specified by an authorized
service center.
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW
App.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
an authorized service center and added to the
vehicle.
The primary user has access to the following
settings, for example:
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.
Confirming a BMW ID
If the BMW ID was registered by the author-
ized service center and added to the vehicle,
the BMW ID must be confirmed in the vehicle.
Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID.
▷
▷
Configuring vehicle-wide data protection
settings.
1. Select the BMW ID.
Creating the main digital key.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
Additional information:
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-
phone.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
It may be necessary to log in again with the
BMW ID.
Personalized settings
Automatic driver recognition
Principle
This icon is displayed on the status bar
and indicates when it is necessary to login
again.
1. Select the BMW ID.
Automatic driver recognition can activate a
BMW ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must be
assigned to the BMW ID. After unlocking, the
BMW ID can be changed.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
Another login will be attempted. Once suc-
cessfully logged in, all functions can be used
again.
If driver recognition has been configured, auto-
matic activation of the BMW ID is triggered by
the following:
My BMW app
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the My
BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-
ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user
management.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using a door han-
dle. The assigned vehicle key or the as-
signed digital key must be carried with you.
Alternatively, an authorized service center can
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
control display in the corresponding vehicle.
▷
By unlocking automatically when ap-
proaching the vehicle. The assigned vehicle
key or the assigned digital key must be car-
68
Personal settings
CONTROLS
ried with you. Depending on the country, it
may not be possible to recognize the digital
key.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures.
If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are lo-
cated near the vehicle, BMW IDs are activated
according to the following priority:
1.
To add a profile picture, tap the
BMW ID icon or profile picture on the status
bar.
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
activation of the assigned BMW ID.
2. Select the desired BMW ID.
3. "Profile settings"
▷
If a vehicle key and digital key are detected
at the same time, the digital key triggers
activation of the assigned BMW ID.
4. "My BMW ID"
5. "Picture"
▷
The BMW ID of the key last detected on the
driver’s door is activated.
6. Select the desired profile picture.
The profile picture from the My BMW App pro-
file can be applied to BMW IDs. To do so,
synchronization with the BMW Cloud must be
enabled in the settings. Once a profile picture
is taken from the My BMW App, the default
profile images can only be used if the profile
picture on the My BMW App is deleted or syn-
chronization is disabled.
If the BMW ID could not be detected when the
vehicle was unlocked, select the BMW ID on
the welcome window.
Setting/adjusting automatic driver recognition
1.
To set or adjust automatic driver recog-
nition, tap the BMW ID icon or profile image
on the status bar.
Setting synchronization
2. "Profile settings"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. Select the desired setting.
Principle
If synchronization is on, settings from the fol-
lowing areas, for example, are synchronized:
Transfer of the vehicle key
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile image.
A vehicle key assigned to a BMW ID can be
used to view or change the stored personal
settings.
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
address, or map settings.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
tions.
If driver recognition has been configured for a
vehicle key, reset these settings before giving
the vehicle key to another person.
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
guage, or units.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
The Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions
or the activation word.
Additional information:
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling
and pathway lighting.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronized when logging in for the first time:
69
Personal settings
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Seat and climate comfort functions, e.g.,
driver’s seat position or temperature set-
ting.
Deleting a BMW ID
1.
To delete a BMW ID, tap the BMW ID
icon or profile picture on the status bar.
Privacy menu.
2. "Profile settings"
3. "Manage profiles"
Turning synchronization on/off
4.
Tap the delete icon for the desired
BMW ID.
When deleting BMW IDs, note the following:
1.
To enable/disable settings synchroni-
zation, tap the BMW ID icon or profile pic-
ture on the status bar.
▷
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle
causes the vehicle to be removed from the
My BMW App. If the BMW ID has been
synchronized with the BMW Cloud, the data
stored on the BMW Cloud is retained after
the BMW ID is deleted. If the currently ac-
tive BMW ID is removed, another profile
must be selected.
2. "Profile settings"
3. "My BMW ID"
4. "Synchronize BMW ID"
In addition, the profile picture can be set if it
has not been adopted from the My BMW App.
Configuring PIN protection
Saved BMW IDs can be selected by every ve-
hicle user. If you want to prevent the settings
from being changed or the data from being
viewed for a BMW ID, you can configure PIN
protection.
▷
▷
▷
Deleting the primary user's BMW ID resets
the vehicle to factory settings. The vehicle
is removed from each user’s My BMW App,
and all BMW IDs are removed from the ve-
hicle.
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App
removes the corresponding BMW ID from
the vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchron-
ized with the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data
stored in the BMW Cloud will be retained.
1.
Tap the BMW ID icon or profile picture
on the status bar.
2. Select the desired BMW ID.
3. "Profile settings"
4. "Lock screen"
If the vehicle is removed from the primary
user’s My BMW App, it will also be removed
from the My BMW Apps of all users. The
corresponding BMW IDs are removed from
the vehicle.
5. Enter the desired PIN.
Profile management
Editing profiles
The profile can be changed at any time.
Additional profiles
1.
Tap the BMW ID icon or profile picture
on the status bar.
Principle
Additional profiles can be used to operate the
vehicle without a BMW ID.
2. "Change profile"
3. Select the desired BMW ID or profile.
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.
Driver profile
"Driver ": If no BMW ID is available, vehicle
settings can be saved to this profile.
The BMW ID is activated and associated set-
tings are loaded.
This profile is subject to the following restric-
tions, among others:
70
Personal settings
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Driver cannot be detected automatically.
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
The name and profile image cannot be
changed.
▷
▷
There is no synchronization with the BMW
Cloud.
Driver profiles
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,
navigation functions or saving favorites.
Principle
The profile, and the settings saved to it, can be
transferred to a BMW ID. The BMW ID is then
displayed instead of the profile.
Driver profiles can be used in countries where
BMW ConnectedDrive is not available in order
to save and activate personal vehicle settings
in the vehicle.
Guest profile
"Guest": This profile can be used to oper-
ate the vehicle without changing the settings
saved for other profiles.
Your vehicle can save up to seven driver pro-
files. If a vehicle is used by several people,
each person can use their own driver profile
in the vehicle. The guest driver profile can be
used when driving the vehicle without a driver
profile.
This profile is subject to the following restric-
tions, among others:
▷
▷
Changed settings are not saved.
Automatic driver recognition can activate a
driver profile as soon as the vehicle is un-
locked. To do so, a vehicle key must be linked
to the driver profile.
It is not possible to specify automatic driver
recognition or assign a PIN.
▷
▷
▷
The name and profile image cannot be
changed.
Functional requirement
The vehicle must be stationary to create,
change, delete, or edit a driver profile.
There is no synchronization with the BMW
Cloud.
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,
navigation functions or saving favorites.
Welcome window
A welcome window appears on the control dis-
play after the vehicle is unlocked. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
System limits
It may not be possible to clearly identify the
driver using the vehicle key or digital key in the
following situations, for example:
▷
No driver profile is saved to the vehicle:
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
The welcome is neutral. A new driver profile
can be added.
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys, to which a BMW ID is assigned,
are located outside the driver's side of the
vehicle.
▷
Vehicle key has not been assigned to a
driver profile:
The welcome is neutral. Saved driver pro-
files are shown for selection. A new driver
profile can be added.
▷
If the vehicle was unlocked using the My
BMW App.
▷
A driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key:
The use of personal settings that are stored for
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
71
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. The available driver
profiles are shown for selection. A new
driver profile can be added.
▷
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
By unlocking the vehicle using a door han-
dle. The assigned vehicle key or the as-
signed digital key must be carried with you.
Driver profile, driver
▷
By unlocking automatically when ap-
proaching the vehicle. The assigned vehicle
key or the assigned digital key must be car-
ried with you. Depending on the country, it
may not be possible to recognize the digital
key.
"Driver": A driver profile allows the driver to
save individual vehicle settings as well as cre-
ate a name for this profile and select a profile
image.
Driver profile, guest
"Guest": This driver profile can be used to op-
erate the vehicle without changing the settings
saved for other driver profiles.
If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are lo-
cated near the vehicle, BMW IDs are activated
according to the following priority:
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
activation of the assigned BMW ID.
This profile is subject to the following restric-
tions, among others:
▷
If a vehicle key and digital key are detected
at the same time, the digital key triggers
activation of the assigned BMW ID.
▷
▷
Changed settings are not saved.
It is not possible to specify automatic driver
recognition or assign a PIN.
▷
The BMW ID of the key last detected on the
driver’s door is activated.
▷
The name and profile image cannot be
changed.
If the BMW ID could not be detected when the
vehicle was unlocked, select the BMW ID on
the welcome window.
Adding a driver profile
1.
To add a driver profile, tap the driver
profile icon or profile picture on the status
bar.
Setting/adjusting automatic driver recognition
1.
To set or adjust automatic driver recog-
nition, tap the BMW ID icon or profile image
on the status bar.
2. "Add profile"
3. Change additional settings as necessary,
e.g., automatic driver recognition.
2. "Profile settings"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. Select the desired setting.
Personalized settings
Automatic driver recognition
Principle
Transfer of the vehicle key
A vehicle key assigned to a driver profile can
be used to view or change saved personal set-
tings.
Automatic driver recognition can activate a
driver profile as soon as the vehicle is un-
locked. To do so, a vehicle key must be as-
signed to the driver profile.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
canceled.
If driver recognition has been configured, auto-
matic activation of the BMW ID is triggered by
the following:
You can configure driver recognition in the
driver profile settings.
72
Personal settings
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
Configuring PIN protection
Once saved, driver profiles can be selected by
every user of the vehicle. If you want to prevent
settings from being changed or data from be-
ing viewed for a driver profile, it is possible to
set PIN protection.
If multiple vehicle keys with assigned driver
profiles are located on the driver's side of
the vehicle.
1.
Tap the driver profile icon or profile pic-
ture on the status bar.
2. Select the desired driver profile.
3. "Profile settings"
4. "Lock screen"
5. Enter the desired PIN.
Profile management
Changing driver profiles
The driver profile can be changed at any time.
1.
Tap the driver profile icon or profile pic-
ture on the status bar.
2. "Change profile"
3. Select the desired driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.
The driver profile is activated and associated
settings are loaded.
Deleting the driver profile
1.
To delete a driver profile, tap the driver
profile icon or profile picture on the status
bar.
2. "Profile settings"
3. "Manage profiles"
4.
Tap the icon to delete the desired driver
profile.
System limits
It may not be possible to clearly identify the
driver using the vehicle key in the following sit-
uations, for example:
73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Vehicle key
Principle
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery. If the vehicle key's battery is discharged,
the vehicle key will not be detected. In this
case, drive-ready state can be turned on by
emergency detection of the vehicle key.
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon
Meaning
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
Unlock.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
Lock.
Pre-conditioning, refer to page 282.
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
Open the cargo area.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 158.
Safety information
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
74
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
To replace the vehicle key battery, proceed as
follows:
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward, then re-
move it from the side.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery
NOTICE
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of property damage. Always replace the dis-
charged battery with a battery with the same
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-
cation.
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-
cle key to the side.
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-
ing.
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive terminal facing down.
75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle
key.
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
Removing the integrated key
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open
side of the vehicle key.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-
teries together with household waste.
Integrated key
Principle
The integrated key is built into the vehicle key.
If the electrical system malfunctions, the vehi-
cle can be unlocked and locked manually using
the integrated key.
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
76
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Press the central locking button to unlock
all doors.
Unlocking the vehicle manually
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-
ward with one hand.
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger
door.
5. With the integrated key, close and lock the
front passenger door using the side door
lock.
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key
by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.
If vehicle is de-energized:
1. With the integrated key, close and lock all
doors, except the driver's door, using the
side door lock.
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the
door handle.
4. Open the driver's door.
5. Press the central locking button to unlock
the other doors.
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door
opener of the other doors from the inside.
Locking the vehicle manually
2. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-
ward with one hand.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close all doors.
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's
side and close the front passenger door.
77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Using the integrated key, lock the driver's
door lock clockwise.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. To turn on drive-ready state via emergency
detection of the vehicle key, hold the back
of the vehicle key to the marking on the
steering column. Pay attention to the dis-
play in the instrument cluster.
4. Pull out the vehicle key and release the
door handle.
5. Close the driver's door.
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.
2.
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
If the doors are manually locked from the in-
side, the alarm system is not activated.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
Principle
If the vehicle key's battery is discharged, the
vehicle key will not be detected. In this case,
drive-ready state can be turned on by emer-
gency detection of the vehicle key.
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
78
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Access to vehicle interior
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Principle
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
The vehicle can be unlocked/locked as follows:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Using the door handle.
With the Key Card.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
With the BMW Digital Key.
Hands-free unlocking/locking
Safety information
Warning
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
Warning
The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
To unlock the vehicle using the vehicle
key, press the unlock button on the ve-
hicle key.
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using
the button inside the vehicle, they will not
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.
The alarm system is switched off.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Additional information:
Locking the vehicle
1. To lock the vehicle using the vehicle key,
close the driver’s door.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 92.
Welcome lights, refer to page 157.
BMW ID, refer to page 67.
Driver profiles, refer to page 71.
2.
Press the lock button on the vehicle
key.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
On the door handle
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without using the
vehicle key.
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The following functions are executed:
▷
All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler
flap are locked.
Depending on national-market version, the ve-
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the
door handle using a compatible smartphone
and digital key.
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.
Additional information:
▷
The alarm system is switched on.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be
turned off using the Start/Stop button.
Functional requirements
To get inside the vehicle using the door han-
dle, the following functional requirements must
be met:
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
80
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
hold it there without reaching into the re-
cessed grip.
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to unlock and lock using the digital
key.
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Unlocking the vehicle using the door
handle
Malfunction
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
To unlock the vehicle using the door handle,
reach into the recessed grip on one of the front
doors.
Principle
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
Locking the vehicle with the door
handle
1. To lock the vehicle using the door handle,
close the driver’s door.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear
of the vehicle.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
2. Carry the vehicle key with you.
Touch the grooved surface on the closed
front door handle for approx. 1 second and
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of
the vehicle.
Automatic unlocking and locking must be acti-
vated in the settings.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version,
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital
81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to
do so.
With the Key Card
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle.
If someone is detected on a seat while locking
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 87.
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Additional information:
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the
Key Card
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Actions during unlocking
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,
note the following:
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only
unlock when the driver is within the driver's
door unlocking zone.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-
ter of the driver's door handle.
Functional requirements
To unlock/lock the vehicle hands-free, the fol-
lowing functional requirements must be met:
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the cargo area
are closed.
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the digital key.
With the BMW Digital Key
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
Principle
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, a digital key can be installed
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
lock and lock the vehicle.
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
Additional information:
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Settings, refer to page 92.
82
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Inside the vehicle.
Hands-free opening/closing.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the
BMW Digital Key
General information
The cargo area will be opened to the config-
ured opening height.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is
clear during opening and closing.
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-
sition of the near field communication antenna
depends on the smartphone model.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the cargo area
are closed.
Warning
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the tailgate is clear during opening
and closing.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
▷
The My BMW App Remote Services include
options to lock and unlock a vehicle, among
other things.
Warning
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heating elements while driving.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Cover the edges and ensure that
pointed objects do not hit the windows.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract, and the My BMW App must
be installed on your smartphone.
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
With the vehicle key
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Access to the cargo area
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
The cargo area can be opened/closed as fol-
lows:
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.
In the cargo area.
83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
key also unlocks the doors.
Functional requirements
To access the cargo area using the cargo area,
the following functional requirements must be
met:
Before unlocking the cargo area with the
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
Functional requirements
To access the cargo area using the vehicle key,
the following functional requirements must be
met:
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to detect the digital key.
▷
To open the cargo area with the vehicle
key, the trailer power socket must not be
occupied.
Opening the cargo area
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged
to open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
You must enable the setting for opening
with the vehicle key.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
The trunk can be opened as follows:
Opening the cargo area
▷
Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on
the trunk.
On the vehicle key, press and hold the
button for opening/closing the cargo
area for approx. 1 second.
▷
With Comfort Access: Carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the trunk.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
On the cargo area
Closing the cargo area
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
compatible smartphones with a digital key are
also detected automatically. In this case, the
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.
Additional information:
The cargo area can be closed as follows:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
▷
On the cargo area, press the open/
close button.
▷
On the cargo area, press the lock
button.
84
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The vehicle is locked after closing the cargo
area. To do so, the driver's door must be
closed and the vehicle key must be outside
of the vehicle near the cargo area.
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
▷
Pull the tailgate down slightly. The tailgate
closes automatically.
Pressing the button again continues the
opening process.
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
In the interior
Functional requirements
To open the cargo area using the button in-
side, the trailer power socket must not be oc-
cupied.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing process stops in the following sit-
uations:
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo
area using the button in the vehicle interior.
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
ment.
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever po-
sition P must be engaged before the tailgate
can be opened using the button in the vehicle
interior.
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
Opening the cargo area
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing it again opens the cargo area
again.
To open the cargo area, press the
open/close button for the cargo area
on the driver's door.
By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Closing the cargo area
To open the cargo area, pull and hold
the open/close button for the cargo
area on the driver's door.
Touchless opening and closing of
the cargo area
An acoustic signal sounds before the cargo
area is closed.
Principle
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo
area is possible when carrying the vehicle key
on your person.
Interruption of the opening
procedure
The opening process stops in the following sit-
uations:
Sensors detect specific foot movements near
the center of the trunk, and the trunk opens or
closes.
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
movement is detected.
Hands-free opening of the trunk
1. To open the trunk hands-free, walk behind
the vehicle with the vehicle key, holding it
in the middle at the rear of the vehicle, ap-
proximately one arm’s length away.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
2. Move your foot under the vehicle in the
driving direction and pull it back immedi-
ately. During these movements, the leg
must pass through the range of the sensor.
If contactless opening is used for the cargo
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
Depending on national-market version, con-
tactless opening of the cargo area is also pos-
sible for compatible smartphones with a Digital
Key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Safety information
Warning
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-
ing system flashes.
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch
the vehicle.
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
close the cargo area again.
Hands-free closing of the trunk
To close the trunk hands-free, move your foot,
while carrying the vehicle key on you, in the
same way as for opening the trunk.
Functional requirements
To open/close the trunk hands-free, the fol-
lowing functional requirements must be met:
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
the cargo area again.
Contactless opening and closing of the
trunk must be activated in the settings.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to open and close the cargo area
contactlessly using the Digital Key.
System limits
The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external conditions:
Depending on vehicle equipment:
▷
The trailer power socket must be unoccu-
pied.
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
▷
No trailer hitches should be mounted.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
86
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
General information
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
Movement in range of the sensors may cause
the trunk to open or close unintentionally, e.g.,
when objects are lifted quickly in the vehicle
rear or due to the moving brushes in a car
wash. To prevent such unintended opening of
the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle
key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the
vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
Malfunction
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Warning
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,
it can release itself unexpectedly from the
blocking. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Do not operate the tail-
gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
In the event of an electrical malfunction in the
automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked tail-
gate slowly with a smooth motion by hand.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Activating Key Card
1. To turn on drive-ready state with the Key
Card, place the activated Key Card in the
center of the tray.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
Malfunction
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key
Card if there are objects between the smart-
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or
smartphone case.
1. To activate the Key Card, place the Key
Card in the center of the tray on the center
console.
2. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
BMW Digital Key
Deactivating Key Card
Principle
To deactivate the Key Card, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Vehicle key" / "Key Card" / "Deactivate Key
Card".
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and
start your vehicle using a digital key.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
app can be used to check if the smartphone
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
tions are supported.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
Additional information:
Each vehicle can be provided with a main dig-
ital key. Additional digital keys can be shared
and then deleted.
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.
Turning on drive-ready state with
the Key Card
General information
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be
given to another person, they can be given the
88
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.
Sharing digital keys
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
General information
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID, refer to page 67.
Driver profiles, refer to page 71.
Key Card, refer to page 87.
More information is available online:
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements must be
met for BMW Digital Key:
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For example, you
can disable restrictions for driving stability con-
trol systems and reduce the engine power be-
fore giving your digital key to a novice driver.
For more information, refer to the Connected-
Drive customer portal and the My BMW App.
The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the digital key.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
Enabling the main digital key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
Proof of authorization can be started via the
My BMW App or using the activation code in
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,
the Wallet app.
Deleting digital keys
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-
cle to be enabled.
General information
To enable, follow the instructions given on the
Digital Key menu, BMW app, or control display.
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
To reactivate the main digital key, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Vehicle key" / "Digital Key" / "Reset function".
Deleting the main digital key
The main digital key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
The deletion of the main digital key is com-
pleted immediately.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-
lows:
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
phone with the main digital key, via the smart-
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.
▷
▷
Using the door handle.
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-
tional-market version, the vehicle can be
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-
tion.
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
BMW Digital Key availability and function-
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version.
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.
Deletion via iDrive
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
tray.
Turning on drive-ready state with
the BMW Digital Key
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle key" / "Digital
Key".
2. If necessary, select the digital key.
3. "Delete key"
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
1. To turn on drive-ready state with the BMW
Digital Key, place the smartphone in the
center of the tray.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is
retained and deactivated.
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on
drive-ready state.
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-
ready state.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
90
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The connection has been interrupted by a
transmission tower or other device with a
high transmitting power.
Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
The smartphone is shielded by a building or
metallic object.
Changing smartphones
Buttons for the central
locking system
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new
smartphone is activated.
Principle
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the
inside using the buttons for the central locking
system.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key
is retained and deactivated.
Overview
System limits
With a digital key, the alarm system's interior
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can only
be deactivated using the control display.
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 94.
Malfunction
Your Digital Key may not be detected by the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
The lock button.
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
The unlock button.
▷
There is an object, e.g., chip card or Key
Card, between the smartphone and smart-
phone cover.
91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Locking the vehicle from inside
Unlocking and locking
To lock the vehicle from the inside,
press the lock button on the front door
when the front doors are closed.
Doors
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock" / "Unlock".
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
2. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap
are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle from inside
To unlock the vehicle from the inside,
press the unlock button on the front
door.
▷
"All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Opening the door
Touchless unlocking/locking
When the vehicle is locked, doors can be
opened as follows:
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".
▷
On the front door, press the unlock
button to unlock the doors together.
2. Select the desired setting:
Pull the door opener above the arm-
▷
▷
"Unlock when approaching"
"Lock when walking away".
rest.
▷
▷
Front doors: Pull the door opener on the
door to be opened. The other doors remain
locked.
Enabling this setting also activates au-
tomatic folding of the mirrors. Automatic
folding of the mirrors can be deactivated
again in the corresponding menu.
Rear doors: Pull the door opener on the
door to be opened twice: The first time un-
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Automatic unlocking
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".
Settings
2. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"
"Unlock doors when in P".
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector
lever position P is engaged.
Automatic locking
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock" /
"Lock/unlock" / "Lock after a short time".
92
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking.
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
already unlocked"
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. Go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and
windows"/"Lock" / "Lock/unlock".
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
2. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate button"
▷
▷
▷
"Flash when unlocking"
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.
"Flash when locking"
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate can be
opened.
Locking is confirmed by one flash.
With alarm system:
"Sound on lock/unlock"
When adjusting the opening height, make sure
the clearance above the tailgate is at least
4 in/10 cm.
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Tailgate" / "Opening height"
Folding mirrors in automatically
Automatic folding of the side mirrors can be
adjusted via iDrive.
2. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock" /
"Lock/unlock" / "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock".
Opening/closing the cargo area with
no-touch activation
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Tailgate"
Cargo area
Cargo area button on vehicle key
It is possible to choose where to assign the
cargo area button on the vehicle key.
2. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Open with foot movement"
"Close with foot movement"
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /
"Tailgate" / "VEHICLE KEY" / "Tailgate
button".
Window
Opening windows automatically
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows"
2. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Tailgate"
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened.
2. Select the desired setting.
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"
93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If this setting is enabled, the driver’s window
opens automatically as soon as the vehicle
reaches the saved location.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Alarm system
Opening the cargo area with the
alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
warning system flashes once during closing.
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷
If a door, the hood, or the cargo area is
opened.
▷
▷
If movement is detected inside the vehicle.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
If the vehicle has a different tilt, e.g., due
to an attempt to steal a wheel or when tow-
ing.
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
▷
▷
▷
If the battery voltage is interrupted.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
If the diagnostic socket is used improperly.
If the vehicle is locked when a device is
connected to the diagnostic socket.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
The indicator light on the interior mirror shows
the status of the alarm system:
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
▷
Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷
Optical alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is activated or deactivated
as soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The alarm system is switched on.
The indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-
cle is locked manually from the inside.
94
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor are not activated because the
doors, hood, or tailgate are not closed cor-
rectly. Correctly closed access points are
secured.
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will turn on when all open access
points are closed.
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Alarm system error.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can be turned off as follows:
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
▷
As soon as the vehicle is locked,
press the lock button on the vehicle
key within 30 seconds.
The alarm has been triggered.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt alarm sensor is part of the alarm sys-
tem and monitors the vehicle's tilt.
▷
After turning off the standby state, an
option to turn off the interior motion sensor
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed
on the control display.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are deactivated until the vehicle is locked
again.
Interior motion sensor
The interior motion sensor is part of the alarm
system and monitors the vehicle interior.
Ending the alarm
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle.
The alarm system triggers when movement is
detected inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of
the vehicle key.
The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
Window
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
Principle
The windows can be operated as follows:
An unintentional alarm can be triggered in the
following situations:
95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
With the vehicle key.
On the door handle
Using the door handle.
Principle
Using the switches inside the vehicle.
The windows can be closed using the door
handle without operating the vehicle key.
Safety information
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
while opening and closing.
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment.
Depending on national-market version, the
windows can also be closed via the door han-
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital
key.
With the vehicle key
Additional information:
Opening windows with the vehicle key
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
To open the windows with the vehicle
key, unlock the vehicle, then press and
hold the unlock button on the vehicle
key.
Functional requirements
To close the windows using the door handle,
the following functional requirements must be
met:
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-
ital key.
Closing windows with the vehicle key
With Comfort Access: To close the win-
dows with the vehicle key, lock the ve-
hicle, then press and hold the lock but-
ton on the vehicle key.
Closing windows with the door handle
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
To close a window using the door handle
of a closed front door, place a finger on the
grooved surface of the door handle and hold it
there without reaching into the recessed grip.
96
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
In addition to locking the vehicle, the windows
and sun protection of the glass sunroof are
closed and locked.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Closing the windows
To close the windows, proceed as follows:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
▷
On the door, pull the power window
switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch
is being held.
Inside the vehicle
▷
On the door, pull the power window
switch past the resistance point.
Overview
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
body parts becoming jammed between the
door frame and window while a window is be-
ing closed.
The power window switches are lo-
cated on the doors.
General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Functional requirements
To close the windows inside the vehicle, the
following functional requirements must be met:
Safety information
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside
the vehicle.
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in
the area of movement of the windows.
Opening windows
To open the windows, proceed as follows:
▷
On the door, press the power win-
dow switch to the resistance point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
▷
On the door, press the power win-
dow switch past the resistance
point.
97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing without the anti-trap
mechanism
Overview
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
1.
On the door, pull the power window
switch past the resistance point and hold it.
The window closes with limited anti-trap
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a
certain threshold, closing is stopped.
The safety switch is located on the
driver's door.
2.
On the door, pull the power win-
dow switch past the resistance point again
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
Turning the safety functions on/off
To activate/deactivate the safety func-
tion, press the safety switch on the
driver’s door.
The window closes without the anti-trap
mechanism.
The LED in the button illuminates when the
safety function is switched on.
Opening windows automatically
If the driver’s window is frequently opened in
the same location, the window can be set to
open automatically. This is useful if you fre-
quently use the same parking garage, for ex-
ample.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof sun protection can be
opened and closed.
For the driver’s window to open automat-
ically, the vehicle speed must be below
6 mph/10 km/h and there must be sufficient
GPS reception.
With the vehicle key
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
Opening the sun protection
To open the sun protection, press and
hold the unlock button on the vehicle
key after unlocking.
Safety switch
Principle
The glass sunroof sun protection is opened
as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-
dren, for instance, from opening and closing
the rear windows using the switches in the
rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
98
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing the sun protection
Closing the sun protection
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
The glass sunroof sun protection is closed
as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
finger and hold it there without grasping the
recessed grip.
On the door handle
Besides locking the vehicle, the windows and
sun protection will be closed and locked.
Principle
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
The sun protection can be closed using the
external door handle without operating the ve-
hicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
Inside the vehicle
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment.
Overview
Depending on the national-market version, the
sun protection can also be closed with the ex-
ternal door handle using a compatible smart-
phone with a digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Functional requirement
To close the sun protection using the door
handle, the following functional requirements
must be met:
The sun protection switch is lo-
cated in the headliner.
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the sun protection using the
digital key.
Functional requirements
The sun protection can be operated under the
following conditions:
99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.
The drive-ready state is established.
Operation
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
▷
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection.
Initializing the system
Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
To initialize the system, in the
headliner, press the sun protec-
tion switch upward and hold it
until initialization is complete:
The sun protection is closed
as long as the switch is held
down.
▷
▷
Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷
If the sun protection is closed, it opens then
closes again.
The sun protection opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷
If the sun protection is open, it closes first,
then opens and closes again.
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
Initialization is complete once the sun protec-
tion has opened then closed again.
The sun protection closes automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Push switch up.
The sun protection moves to a
defined position to provide par-
tial shading.
Pressing the switch again closes
the sun protection.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
If the power is interrupted while opening or
closing, the sun protection can only be oper-
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system
can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
100
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
In the event of an accident, having the correct
seat position and using the protection systems
correctly both play an important role. Follow
the information in the following chapters.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 101.
Electrically adjustable seats
Seat belts, refer to page 103.
Head restraints, refer to page 106.
Airbags, refer to page 166.
Principle
Electrically adjustable seats are operated us-
ing the switches on the seat.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Front seats
Safety information
Warning
Additional information:
Memory function, refer to page 111.
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is
stationary.
101
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
Adjusting seat tilt
The switches for setting the seats are located
on the front seats.
To adjust the seat tilt, flip the seat tilt switch up
or down.
Setting the longitudinal direction
Adjusting backrest tilt
To adjust the longitudinal direction, push the
longitudinal direction switch on the seat for-
ward or backward.
To adjust the backrest tilt, flip the backrest tilt
switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
Adjusting the height
Principle
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
To adjust the seat height, press the seat height
switch up or down.
102
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Activate/deactivate the function
Lumbar support
To activate or deactivate the automatic seat
adjuster, proceed as follows:
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re-
gion of the spine. The lower back and spine
are supported to promote an upright sitting po-
sition.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort" /
"Driver" / "Automatically use seat position".
2. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the backrest width
Adjusting the lumbar support
To adjust the lumbar support, proceed as fol-
lows:
▷
To increase or decrease the bulge,
press the lumbar support button
forward or backward.
▷
To move the bulge up or down, press the
lumbar support button up or down.
Functional limitation
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera-
tures.
▷
▷
To decrease the backrest width, push the
front button:
To increase the backrest width, push the
rear button:
Thigh support
Seat belts
Principle
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
To adjust the thigh support, pull the thigh sup-
port lever at the front of the seat then push the
thigh support forward or backward.
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the
correct seat settings.
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
103
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
▷
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
Safety information
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders
were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat
belts checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Correct use of seat belts
To use the seat belts correctly, note the follow-
ing:
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail
in the following situations:
104
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Buckling the seat belt
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active.
1. To fasten the seat belt, guide the seat belt
slowly over the shoulder and hip.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
Icon
Meaning
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
not buckled.
Seat belt on the passenger
seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
responding seat.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
corresponding seat.
Unbuckling the seat belt
1. To open the seat belt, hold the seat belt
firmly.
Rear Occupant Alert
2. Press the red button on the seat belt
buckle.
Principle
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt
winder.
At the end of the drive, the Rear Occupant
Alert informs the driver that occupants may be
present on the rear seats.
Seat belt reminder
General information
Principle
If a door with access to the rear seat row is
operated within 30 minutes before starting a
drive, a notice appears on the control display
and a signal tone sounds at the end of the
drive.
The Seat Belt Warning warns the driver if the
seat belts are not fastened.
General information
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the
notice is displayed again after the drive is com-
plete.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations:
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
When objects are lying on a seat.
105
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Activating/deactivating the Rear
Occupant Alert
To activate or deactivate the Rear Occupant
Alert, proceed as follows:
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Rear Occupant Alert".
2. Select the desired setting.
Warning
Safety mode
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-
matically tightened once after driving off, if the
seat belt is fastened.
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,
during emergency braking, the front seat belts
are automatically pretensioned.
Warning
After a critical driving situation without an acci-
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
seat belt before continuing to drive.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷
To lower the height of the head restraint,
press the release button on the backrest,
106
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
arrow 1, then push the head restraint down-
ward.
Rear head restraints
▷
To raise the height of the head restraint,
push the head restraint upward.
Safety information
Warning
Adjusting the distance
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
▷
▷
To move the head restraint backward,
press the button on the side of the head re-
straint, then push the head restraint back-
ward.
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
To move the head restraint forward, press
the button on the side of the head restraint,
then pull the head restraint forward.
Warning
Removing/attaching head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
1. Raise the head restraint to the resistance
point.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
2. Press the release button on the backrest,
arrow 1, then pull the head restraint com-
pletely out.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
107
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Outer head restraints: Adjusting the
height
Exterior mirrors
Principle
Exterior mirror settings are saved to the active
BMW ID or driver profile. If the BMW ID or
driver profile is reactivated later, the saved po-
sition is brought up automatically.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's
side exterior mirror also dims automatically.
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to
control this.
▷
▷
To lower the head restraint, press the re-
lease button on the backrest, arrow 1, then
push the head restraint downward.
To raise the head restraint, push the head
restraint upward.
Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior
mirrors are heated automatically as necessary
and when drive-ready state is on.
Removing/attaching head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
1. Fold down the corresponding rear seat
backrest.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
To fold down the rear seat backrest, follow
the steps for enlarging the cargo area.
Safety information
2. Raise the head restraint to the resistance
point.
Warning
3. Press both release buttons on the backrest,
arrows 1, simultaneously then pull the head
restraint completely out.
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-
pear. The distance to the road users behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate
the distance to the traffic behind by looking
over your shoulder.
Additional information:
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 301.
108
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirrors
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Icon
Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
To fold the exterior mirrors in/out,
press the button for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out on the driver's door.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor.
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
Select right exterior mirror.
▷
▷
In car washes.
On narrow roads.
Selecting/adjusting the exterior
mirrors
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
▷
To select the left exterior mirror,
press the corresponding button on
the driver’s door. The LED illumi-
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
nates.
▷
To select the right exterior mirror,
press the corresponding button on
the driver’s door. The LED illumi-
nates.
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
On the driver's door, press the button
for adjusting the exterior mirrors.
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
109
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Automatic Curb Monitor
Overview
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
1.
To activate the Automatic Curb
Monitor, press the exterior mirror button on
the driver’s door. The LED illuminates.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the automatic dimming interior mirror:
2. Engage selector lever position R.
▷
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
When the trailer power socket is occupied or
trailer towing is activated, the Automatic Curb
Monitor is deactivated.
Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb
Monitor
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
To deactivate the Automatic Curb Mon-
itor, press the exterior mirror button on
the front passenger door. The LED illu-
minates and the LED of the driver’s side out-
side mirror goes out.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary only.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Principle
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Photocells in the mirror glass and on the rear
of the mirror are used to control glare.
The position of the steering wheel can be
changed by manually adjusting the height and
longitudinal direction.
110
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
1. On the steering column, press the release
lever all the way down.
Overview
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to a height
and angle that suits the seat position.
3. Flip the lever back again.
Memory function
Principle
The memory buttons are located on the driv-
er's door.
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
Storing settings
To save settings to memory using the buttons,
proceed as follows:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
Lumbar support position.
Height of the Head-up display.
1. Set the desired position.
2.
Press the SET button on the driver's
door. The LED illuminates.
Safety information
3. Press memory button 1 or 2 while the LED
is illuminated. A successful save is indi-
cated by a signal tone.
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-
tion when the vehicle is stationary.
To save settings to memory via iDrive, proceed
as follows:
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".
2. Select the desired seat position.
3. Tap the icon for the SET button.
111
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Calling up settings
To access settings saved to memory using the
buttons, proceed as follows:
Press memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
To bring up settings saved to memory via
iDrive, proceed as follows:
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".
2. Select the desired seat.
3. Select the desired seat position.
Seat climate control
Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Additional information:
Climate control, refer to page 271.
112
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
people, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Warning
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Children in the rear seat
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
General information
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
113
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Installing child restraint
systems
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
General information
When selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems, pay close attention to the op-
erating and safety instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
When using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Additional information:
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-
bag, refer to page 168.
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
114
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
On the front passenger seat
Child seat security
Deactivating the airbag
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
After mounting a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Locking the seat belt
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.
Additional information:
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-
bag, refer to page 168.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in,
then pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The seat belt is disabled.
Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, to the highest position. This
seat position and height ensure the best pos-
sible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
Unlocking the seat belt
1. Open the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in
completely.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the backrest tilt so that the seat
belt sits properly.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible seat belt
guide position is reached.
Lower anchors for child
restraint systems
Principle
LATCH child restraint systems establish a se-
cure connection to the vehicle in combination
with LATCH anchors.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
115
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
When selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems, pay close attention to the op-
erating and safety instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
Position
Icon
Meaning
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Mounts for lower anchors
Seats equipped with lower an-
chors are marked with a pair
(2) of LATCH icons.
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
Safety information
Warning
If the lower anchors on child restraint system
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint
system will not be able to provide suitable
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are
correctly engaged and that the child restraint
system fits securely against the backrest.
Before attaching child restraint
systems
Before installing a child restraint system, pull
the seat belt away from the lower anchors of
the child restraint system.
Warning
Installing child restraint systems
To install the child restraint system in the vehi-
cle, proceed as follows:
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
1. Mount the child restraint system in accord-
ance with the instructions from the child
seat manufacturer.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
anchors engage correctly on both sides in
the lower seat mounts.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
116
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Safety information
Icon
Meaning
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
Routing the retaining strap
Warning
Rear seat
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
1
Driving direction
Warning
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
Hook for upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
Rear seat
To attach the upper strap to the attachment
point, proceed as follows:
1. Raise the head restraint as needed.
2. Guide the upper strap between the head
restraint rods, or along both sides of the
117
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
head restraint rods, to the attachment
point.
Icon
Meaning
Child safety lock.
3. Guide the strap between the backrest and
cargo cover, where applicable.
4. Attach the strap's hook to the attachment
point.
Apply the child safety lock.
5. Tighten the strap.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
After locking, make sure that the door cannot
be opened from the inside.
Principle
Safety switch for the rear
To prevent the rear doors and windows from
being opened from the inside, there is a switch
on the corresponding rear door's frame or a
safety switch on the driver’s door armrest.
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
The safety switch for the rear is located
on the driver's door.
Doors
To lock rear functions, press the safety
switch in the driver’s door. The LED is
illuminated when the safety function is
turned on.
Various functions are locked and cannot be
operated in the rear such as the power win-
dows.
To secure the rear doors, release/lock the
safety switch on the rear door using the
integrated key.
118
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
Driving off
To drive off with the vehicle, proceed as fol-
lows:
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is turned on.
Additional information:
3. Engage the desired selector lever position,
e.g., D or R.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
4. Release the parking brake.
Start/Stop button
5. To drive off, release the brake pedal and
press the accelerator pedal.
Principle
The Start/Stop button is used to turn vehicle
operating states on/off.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.
Overview
▷
When the vehicle is stationary and drive-
ready state is on, as soon as selector lever
position P is disengaged.
▷
With electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
environment. This helps other road users, e.g.,
pedestrians or cyclists, be able to see the vehi-
cle better.
The Start/Stop button is located on the
center console.
Auto Start/Stop function
Turning on the drive-ready state
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop
button.
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains on despite
the engine being stopped. The engine starts
automatically for driving off.
Pushing the Start/Stop button again will turn
off drive-ready state and turn on standby state.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 43.
Standby state, refer to page 43.
119
Driving
CONTROLS
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to
standby state whenever the engine is started
using the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.
Brake pedal was not depressed hard
enough.
The function is activated at low speeds.
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and
automatic climate control is switched on.
Engine stop
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or
cooled as desired.
Functional requirements
When stopping, the engine switches off auto-
matically if the following requirements are met:
Condensation is about to form on windows
and automatic climate control is on.
Engine or other components are not at op-
erating temperature.
▷
▷
Selector lever is in selector lever position D.
The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill, or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.
Without Mild Hybrid technology: The
wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering
wheel is being turned.
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled, or the driv-
er's door is closed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.
At higher elevations.
Manual engine stop
If the engine does not shut off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped, the engine can be
shut off manually as follows:
The hood is unlocked.
Hill Descent Control is activated.
For stop-and-go traffic.
▷
By quickly depressing the brake pedal from
its current position.
Selector lever position is S or R.
After reversing.
▷
By engaging selector lever position P.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
When driving off, the engine starts automati-
cally if the following requirements are met:
Automatic climate control with engine
switched off
The automatic climate control system's air flow
is reduced when the engine is switched off.
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is pressed when
Automatic Hold is activated.
Display in the instrument cluster
The READY indicator on the
instrument cluster shows that
the Auto Start/Stop function is
ready to start the engine auto-
matically.
Driving off with the Auto Start/Stop
function
To drive off, accelerate normally after starting
the engine.
Safety mode
If one of the following conditions is met, the
engine will not start automatically after it has
been stopped automatically:
Functional limitations
The engine does not switch off automatically in
situations like the following:
120
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, and the
driver’s door is open.
Via selector lever position or drive
mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated in
the following situations:
The hood has been unlocked.
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
▷
▷
When selector lever position S is engaged.
The engine can only be started using the Start/
Stop button.
If SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode is
selected in My Modes.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the vehicle interior is excessively
warm, and the air conditioning is on.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
When the vehicle interior is excessively
cool, and the heating is on.
Condensation is about to form on windows
and automatic climate control is on.
Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
Without mild hybrid technology:
In case of a steering operation.
2. Engage the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
▷
When changing the selector lever position
from D or P to R.
▷
▷
If the vehicle battery is deeply discharged.
When starting an oil level measurement.
Malfunction
Deactivating the system manually
Auto Start/Stop no longer shuts off the engine
automatically in the event of a malfunction. A
Check Control message is displayed on the
instrument cluster. You may continue driving.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Principle
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer
switch off automatically.
If this function is deactivated while the engine
is being stopped automatically, the engine will
start.
Steptronic transmission
Via iDrive
Principle
1. To manually activate Auto Start/Stop, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain
and chassis" / "Activate Auto Start/Stop".
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. The shift paddles can
be used to shift gear manually as necessary.
2. Select the desired setting.
121
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
Safety information
After standby state is switched off, if selec-
tor lever position N is engaged.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,
e.g., by applying the parking brake.
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D, S,
or R is engaged.
The vehicle may begin to move if selector lever
position P is not engaged and the parking
brake is not applied before leaving the vehicle.
Selector lever positions
Additional information:
Gear position D
Parking brake, refer to page 129.
In selector lever position D, all gears for for-
ward travel are shifted automatically.
Engaging selector lever positions
The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake
pedal is released.
General information
If a gear position or reverse gear is engaged,
the vehicle will move if the brake pedal is not
pressed when driving off.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and
gear position D without pressing the brake.
R reverse gear
To reverse, engage selector lever position R.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is
stationary.
Functional requirements
The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake
pedal is released.
To change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position, drive-ready state
must be on and the brake pedal must be de-
pressed.
N Neutral
To push the vehicle or have it coast without
using the drive system, engage selector lever
position N, e.g., in car washes.
Selection lever position P cannot be disen-
gaged until all technical prerequisites are met.
Engaging a selector lever position
To engage the selector lever position, proceed
as follows:
Parking position P
General information
In selector lever position P, the drive is blocked
by the transmission, e.g., to park the vehicle.
1. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever in the desired
direction, past the resistance point as nec-
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P engages automati-
cally in situations like the following:
122
Driving
CONTROLS
essary. The selector lever automatically re-
turns to the center position when released.
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car
wash.
To engage selector lever position N, proceed
as follows:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Switch on drive-ready state.
3. If necessary, loosen the belt.
4. If necessary, open the door.
5. Engage selector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Engaging selector lever position P
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The vehicle can roll.
The parking brake is engaged automatically
after approx. 35 minutes.
If the system is not operational, you may not
be able to change the selector lever position.
If necessary, release the transmission lock
electronically.
To engage selector lever position P,
press the parking brake button on the
center console.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 124.
The parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion lock is engaged.
Kickdown
The maximum driving performance is achieved
with kickdown.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Principle
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
coast without power for a short distance, e.g.,
in a car wash or when being pushed.
S program
Principle
Engaging selector lever position N
The S program's shift points and shift times
are designed for sportier handling. The trans-
mission, for instance shifts up later and the
shifting times are shorter.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not switch off standby
123
Driving
CONTROLS
Activating the Sport program
Engaging selector lever position N
To engage selector lever position N, proceed
as follows:
1. Quickly push the Start/Stop button three
times without pressing the brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Within 30 seconds, push the selector lever
into position N until position N is shown on
the selector lever.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
To activate the Sport program, pull the selector
lever from selector lever position D to D/S.
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
Shift paddles
Ending the Sport program
To cancel the Sport program, move the selec-
tor lever to D/S.
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to change gears manually.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
General information
Displays in the instrument cluster
Shifting
The selector lever position, for
example, P, is shown on the in-
strument cluster.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
speed limits are reached.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
General information
To maneuver the vehicle out of a hazardous
area, release the transmission lock electroni-
cally.
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
with a wheel chock.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
124
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Advanced mode
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-
tronic transmission offers an advanced mode
with adapted shift characteristics.
Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M.
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible
gear.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
To have the Steptronic transmission auto-
matically shift down to the lowest possible
gear, pull and hold the left shift paddle.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
There is no downshifting for kickdown.
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷
Automatic upshifting is prevented in
manual mode.
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when
speed limits are reached.
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
If M2 is set manually when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, the transmission no longer shifts down
to M1.
Enabling advanced mode
Advanced mode turns on in the following sit-
uations, for example:
Shifting
▷
▷
The transmission is in manual mode.
"SPORT PLUS": Settings for drive system
in Sport Mode from My Modes.
Steptronic Sport
transmission: Launch
Control
▷
▷
To upshift, pull the right shift paddle.
To downshift, pull the left shift paddle.
Principle
Launch Control ensures optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction and with dry ambi-
ent conditions.
The selected gear is shown briefly on the
instrument cluster, then the current gear is
shown again.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
125
Driving
CONTROLS
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for a short time before
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
when used again.
Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 306.
Functional requirement
Launch Control can be used when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
System limits
Driving off with Launch Control
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
Launch Control mode.
To drive off with Launch Control, proceed as
follows:
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Engage forward gear.
Sport Boost function
3.
Press the My Modes button on the
center console.
Principle
The SPORT BOOST function can be used for
upcoming acceleration, for example.
4. Enable the driving dynamics setting:
"SPORT PLUS".
This function is operated with the shift paddles
on the steering wheel.
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
The system prepares the vehicle.
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down and hold.
Overview
Launch Control information is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
8. Release the brake within a few seconds of
the Launch Control information illuminating.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting is performed automatically.
Launch Control stays on as long as the
Launch Control information is displayed
and the accelerator pedal is not released.
The shift paddles are located on the steering
wheel.
Additional information:
Setting for increased driving dynamics, refer to
page 207.
126
Driving
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Deactivating the function
SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the right shift
paddle until this display goes out.
My Modes
Principle
My Modes are used to adjust vehicle handling
and customize the overall experience in the
interior.
▷
▷
▷
Arrow 1: The SPORT BOOST function is ac-
tive.
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the
situation using the various My Modes.
Arrow 2: Countdown, the SPORT BOOST
function is active.
General information
This affects the following systems, depending
on vehicle equipment:
Arrow 3: The SPORT BOOST function is
used for maximum acceleration.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drive system.
Using the function
1. SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the left shift
paddle until this display appears, arrow 1.
Steering.
Suspension.
▷
▷
The function is active.
Cruise control.
A countdown is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster, arrow 2.
Display on the instrument cluster.
Comfort functions in vehicle interior.
BMW IconicSounds.
2. Before the countdown changes to 0, press
the accelerator pedal.
▷
▷
The vehicle accelerates.
Overview
BOOST: This display is shown on the
instrument cluster, arrow 3.
The countdown can be restarted, for example
if the function cannot be used immediately.
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left
shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.
Stopping the function
The SPORT BOOST function is automatically
interrupted if the countdown has reached 0
or if the function was used in the acceleration
process.
My Modes button on the center con-
sole.
127
Driving
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Efficient mode, refer to page 324.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷
If applicable, the driving mode
selected is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
More My Modes
Depending on the vehicle equipment, more My
Modes are available that change the ambiance
in the vehicle interior:
My Modes in detail
▷
▷
▷
▷
Expressive Mode.
Digital Art Mode.
Relax Mode.
General information
Various My Modes are available depending on
vehicle equipment.
Silent Mode.
Some My Modes affect vehicle handling. As
such, these are also referred to as drive
modes.
Selecting My Modes
To select My Modes, proceed as follows:
Personal Mode
Personal Mode is a drive mode that provides
comfort-related settings.
1.
Press the My Modes button on the
center console.
2. Select the desired mode.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a drive mode that provides in-
creased vehicle agility.
Configuring My Modes
Some My Modes can be configured individu-
ally.
Individual settings, e.g., for the driving dynam-
ics, chassis, and drive system, can be config-
ured as needed.
1.
Press the My Modes button on the
center console.
2. Select the desired mode.
3. Select the settings icon.
"SPORT PLUS": Under Driving Dynamics, this
setting deactivates Dynamic Stability Control,
thus limiting driving stability.
Additional information:
4. Select the desired settings.
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 206.
Changing the start mode
Some My Modes can be set as the start mode.
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 207.
The set start mode activates when drive-ready
state is turned on.
Efficient Mode
Efficient Mode is a drive mode that provides
consumption-optimized tuning and an antici-
patory display.
1.
Press the My Modes button on the
center console.
2. Select the desired mode.
3. Select the settings icon.
128
Driving
CONTROLS
4. "Start mode"
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
5. Select the desired mode.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Drive-off assistant
Principle
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
On inclines, in selector lever position D, S, or
R, this system prevents the vehicle from rolling
opposite the set driving direction and provides
drive-off support.
Warning
Driving off
Engage a gear position and step on the accel-
erator pedal to drive off.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
The parking brake is released automatically.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Depending on the load and driving situation or
when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back
slightly.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
If necessary, activate Automatic Hold.
Additional information.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
The parking brake button is located on
the center console.
129
Driving
CONTROLS
"Drivetrain and chassis" / "Apply parking
brake".
Setting the parking brake
With a stationary vehicle
2. Select the desired setting.
In selector lever position N, the parking brake
does not engage automatically.
To engage the parking brake, press
the parking brake button on the center
console.
Releasing the parking brake
The LED illuminates.
Releasing the parking brake manually
To release the parking brake manually, pro-
ceed as follows:
The indicator light for the parking brake
illuminates red.
The parking brake is engaged and
transmission lock is engaged.
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
While driving
Using the parking brake while driving serves as
emergency braking.
2.
Push the parking brake button on
the center console while pressing the brake
pedal.
To brake the vehicle, press and hold
the parking brake button on the center
console. The vehicle brakes hard for as
long as the button is pressed.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
The transmission lock remains engaged
until a gear position is selected.
The indicator light for the parking brake
illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-
ary.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
Using the parking brake via iDrive
The parking brake can be engaged or disen-
gaged via iDrive. Additional information is also
displayed.
Engaging the parking brake
automatically
In some situations, the parking brake is en-
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic
Hold.
1. To operate the parking brake via iDrive, go
through the menu as follows. Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain
and chassis" / "Apply parking brake".
To apply the parking brake automatically when
drive-ready state is turned off, configure the
system as follows:
2. Select the desired setting.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
before you exit.
130
Driving
CONTROLS
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.
After getting out of the vehicle, secure it to pre-
vent it from rolling away, using a wheel chock,
for example.
The driver’s door is open for more than one
second and no pedal is pressed during this
time.
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the
vehicle to a stop while driving.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
a power interruption, an initialization may be
required.
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated.
Safety information
1. Activate standby state.
Warning
2.
3.
Press the parking brake button on
the center console.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Press the parking brake button
again after 2 seconds.
The Check Control messages for the park-
ing brake go out.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Function-related noises are normal.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
The indicator light for the parking brake
indicates that the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Automatic Hold
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Principle
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-
matically applying and releasing the brake,
e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-
and-go traffic.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is station-
ary.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
General information
The parking brake engages automatically if the
following requirements are met:
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
131
Driving
CONTROLS
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
the indicator light for the parking brake illumi-
nates green.
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
Overview
The indicator light for the parking brake
changes from green to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The Automatic Hold button is located
on the center console.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
Activating Automatic Hold
To activate Automatic Hold, proceed as fol-
lows:
The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving
off, depending on the load and driving situation
or when towing a trailer.
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Use the parking brake as needed to prevent
the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.
2.
Press the Automatic Hold button on
the center console.
Deactivate Automatic Hold
To deactivate Automatic Hold, proceed as fol-
lows:
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light for Automatic Hold
illuminates green.
Press the Automatic Hold button on the
center console.
Automatic Hold is activated.
The LED goes out.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
The indicator light for Automatic Hold
goes out.
If Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed, the vehicle is automatically se-
cured to prevent it from rolling away after stop-
ping.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press the brake pedal when deactivating.
As soon as Automatic Hold secures the
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,
132
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
xView
Vehicle features and options
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
information is shown in xView, for example:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Specified longitudinal inclination.
Specified lateral inclination.
Specified height for current position.
Additional information:
With all-wheel drive: Distribution of drive
torque to wheels.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Adjusting the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or
various static content for the display can be
selected on the left-hand side bar:
Live Vehicle
Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle
status or current driving condition.
1. To adjust the display, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Live
Vehicle".
2. Select the desired setting.
General information
Corresponding information is shown on the
control display depending on the driving situa-
tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Adaptive content or various static content can
be selected.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance
the speed. Information can be recorded with-
out you having to look away from the road.
Displayable content
The following Live Vehicle content is displayed
in alternating sequence or statically depending
on the setting:
The steering wheel buttons can be used to
configure various views for the Head-up dis-
play. Additional settings can be made on the
control display, e.g., brightness or height.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 150.
Current driving condition, refer to page 150.
Sport displays, refer to page 150.
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 324.
Trip data, refer to page 146.
xView.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Additional information:
The displayed content may depend on the se-
lected drive mode.
Caring for special components, refer to
page 391.
133
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
Overview
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
Turning the Head-up display on/off
To turn the Head-up display on/off, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Displays" / "Head-up display" / "Head-up
display".
Head-up display views are projected onto the
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-
tective glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
Settings
Various settings can be configured for the
Head-up display, e.g., height, rotation, or
brightness. You can also set up specific views
on the Head-up display separately, e.g., for
Driver Assistance information.
Displayable information
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Head-up
display".
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed.
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Sport displays.
2. Select the desired setting.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of
the Head-up display can be stored using the
memory function.
Shift lights.
The Efficiency Coach.
Lists and messages.
The driver assistance systems.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
▷
▷
Seat position.
Objects on the Head-up display's protective
glass.
Configuring a view
Views can be configured for the Head-up dis-
play independently of the view on the instru-
ment cluster, e.g., reduced view.
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-
tective glass.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet road.
1.
Press the Settings button on the
steering wheel.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
134
Displays
CONTROLS
Special windshield
The special windshield is part of the Head-up
display system.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Saved Check Control messages and additional
information such as the cause of a fault or
the required action can be called up via Check
Control.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable this system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" / "Check
Control".
Check Control
2. Select the desired text message.
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
Display
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster as a text message with an
icon.
A Check Control message is displayed as
a combination of indicator lights or warning
lights and text messages on the instrument
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound
and a text message may appear on the control
display.
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-
matically displayed on the control display. If
several faults occur at once, the messages are
displayed consecutively.
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent
Check Control messages are permanently dis-
played but may be hidden temporarily.
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate
an active or saved Check Control mes-
sage.
Hiding Check Control messages
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
sages are automatically displayed again after
approx. 8 seconds.
An arrow icon next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
Indicator lights and warning lights
Principle
To hide Check Control messages, tilt
the knurled wheel on the steering
wheel to the left.
The indicator lights and warning lights show
the status of some vehicle functions or indicate
when there is a fault in monitored systems.
135
Displays
CONTROLS
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Some indicator lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Emergency Stop Assistant
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Red lights
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 196.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
buckled.
Risk of collision
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 105.
The warning light illuminates or flashes
in conjunction with an acoustic signal if
there is a risk of imminent collision.
Airbag system
Additional information:
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Pedestrian Warning
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously: the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
The warning light illuminates: risk of
collision with a person, e.g., a pedes-
trian or a cyclist detected. Increased
awareness is required.
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:
risk of imminent collision with a person, e.g.,
a pedestrian or a cyclist detected. Immediately
initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 166.
Additional information:
Parking brake
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 177.
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Warning
Parking brake, refer to page 129.
The warning light illuminates: risk of
collision, e.g., with a vehicle detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Brake system
The brake pads are worn or there is
another issue with the brake system.
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:
risk of imminent collision with a vehicle de-
tected. Immediately initiate braking or an eva-
sive maneuver.
The braking assistance may not be op-
erational. A higher pedal force may be
required for braking.
Additional information:
136
Displays
CONTROLS
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
tions, refer to page 174.
Assisted Driving Mode
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds:
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the right
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
The warning light illuminates: risk of
collision with a vehicle crossing from
the right detected. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal
sounds:
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-
minent. The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the
system will not execute any supporting steer-
ing movements.
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:
risk of imminent collision with a crossing vehi-
cle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 179.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on
steering wheel
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds:
The warning light illuminates: risk of
collision with a vehicle crossing from
the left detected. Increased awareness
is required.
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment
and national-market version, the driver's line of
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.
System interruption is imminent.
The warning light flashes and a signal sounds:
risk of imminent collision with a crossing vehi-
cle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
Additional information:
It is possible that the system will not execute
any supporting steering movements.
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 179.
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with
your hands and pay attention to the surround-
ing traffic.
Distance control
Additional information:
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Additional information:
Yellow lights
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Antilock Braking System
137
Displays
CONTROLS
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System is not
available.
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
The ability to steer may be restricted during full
braking.
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 206.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated, or
increased driving dynamics activated
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or enhanced driving dynamics is acti-
vated.
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 206.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 206.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds: A system interruption is
imminent.
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 207.
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has
been crossed.
Drive-off support
Drive-off support is activated.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Additional information:
Drive-off support, refer to page 208.
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on
steering wheel
Flat tire monitor
Steering wheel icon illuminates yellow:
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Additional information:
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 353.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
Tire pressure monitor
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Follow the information in the Check
Control message.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
138
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Additional information:
In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 373.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
Acoustic pedestrian protection has
malfunctioned. Increased caution when
maneuvering.
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to
page 119.
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 346.
Steering system
Green lights
The steering system may not be op-
erational.
Turn signal
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
The turn signal is turned on.
If the indicator light is flashing unusu-
ally fast, this indicates that a turn signal
bulb has failed.
Exhaust emissions
Additional information:
▷
The warning light illuminates:
Turn signal, refer to page 152.
The exhaust gas quality is declining,
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Parking lights
The parking lights are turned on.
Additional information:
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,
refer to page 156.
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Low-beam headlights
The low-beam headlights are turned
on.
Additional information:
139
Displays
CONTROLS
Parking lights, low-beam headlights, refer to
page 156.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Low-beam headlights are turned on,
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant is activated.
Distance control
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been
The high-beam headlights are turned on and
off automatically depending on the traffic.
Additional information:
detected ahead of you.
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 153.
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has
driven off.
Additional information:
Lane departure warning
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
Speed Limit Assistant
Indicator light flashes: System is ac-
tively issuing a warning. If necessary, the sys-
tem performs a steering intervention.
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a
green checkmark is displayed.
Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 183.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.
Automatic Hold is activated
After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-
matically secures the vehicle to prevent
it from rolling away.
Assisted Driving Mode
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
progress
Automatic Hold secures the stopped
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,
e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.
Arrow icon for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 131.
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 228.
140
Displays
CONTROLS
Lane Change Assistant: lane change not
possible
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Assisted Driving Mode
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Additional information:
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 228.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Additional information:
White lights
Cruise Control with Distance Control
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 231.
No Distance Control because accelera-
tor pedal is being pressed.
Blue lights
Additional information:
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
High-beam headlights
High-beam headlights have been
turned on.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system can be used.
Additional information:
Additional information:
High-beam headlights, refer to page 152.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 231.
Gray lights
Seat belt reminder
Selection lists
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
Principle
Additional information:
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
Seat belts, refer to page 103.
Distance control
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
List of recent calls.
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-
tor pedal.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Additional information:
141
Displays
CONTROLS
Example: selecting a radio station
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
1.
To select a radio station, press the
entertainment source button on the right of
the steering wheel.
Operating Function
elements
2.
To switch to the radio stations list,
tilt the knurled wheel to the right.
Change the entertainment
source.
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio
station.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed list.
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected radio station.
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
Example: changing the entertainment
source
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the list for currently selected en-
tertainment source or scroll up
or down in the list.
1.
Press the entertainment sources
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
button.
2.
To select an entertainment source,
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
turn the knurled wheel.
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected entertainment source.
Display
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version.
142
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
Display
Information on upshifts or downshifts or the
engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
Needle in lower range of arrow 1: display for
energy recovery such as while decelerating,
CHARGE.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
Needle in upper range of arrow 2: drive power
in percent, POWER.
With shift paddles: Sport program.
Shift information.
Reduced drive power
The available drive power may be reduced due
to certain factors. The power gauge is auto-
matically adjusted accordingly.
Additional information:
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
Shift paddles, refer to page 124.
Icon
Description
Power gauge
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
Enabling/disabling the power gauge
The power gauge or the tachometer is dis-
played depending on the selected drive mode
or the individually configured layout.
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion:
Drive power limitation defined
via the BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
A Check Control message is
displayed in addition where ap-
plicable.
143
Displays
CONTROLS
Tachometer
Engine temperature
The engine temperature is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
General information
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
▷
If the engine is cold, the nee-
dle is in the blue temperature
range, close to the limit po-
sition of the temperature dis-
play. WARM-UP is also dis-
played.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷
▷
At normal operating temperature, the nee-
dle is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
The tachometer display changes depending
on the selected driving mode.
If the engine is hot, the needle is in the
red temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Reduced rotational speed range
The reduced rotational speed range may be
due to certain factors, e.g., a cold drive sys-
tem. The tachometer display is automatically
adjusted depending on the available rotational
speed range.
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 369.
Display
The engine temperature is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
▷
If the engine is cold, the nee-
dle is in the blue temperature
range, close to the left-hand
limit position of the temper-
ature display. WARM-UP is
also displayed.
If OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, drive-ready state
is switched off and standby
state is switched on.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
If READY is displayed in the in-
strument cluster, the Auto Start/
Stop function is ready to start
the engine automatically.
▷
▷
At normal operating temperature, the nee-
dle is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
If the engine is hot, the needle is in the
red temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Additional information:
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to
page 41.
Additional information:
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 119.
Coolant level, refer to page 369.
144
Displays
CONTROLS
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Functional requirements
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.
▷
Advanced mode must be activated.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Additional information:
Advanced mode, refer to page 125.
Outside temperature
Display
Principle
If the outside temperature indicator drops to
+37℉/+3℃ or lower, there is an increased risk
of slippery conditions.
A signal sounds and a Check Control message
is displayed.
When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,
the temperature displayed may differ slightly
from the actual outside temperature due to ex-
ternal environmental influences.
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate
an upcoming shift point.
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the
latest.
Safety information
When the maximum rotational speed is
reached, the entire display flashes red and
the fuel supply is interrupted in order to
protect the engine.
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Modify your driving style to the weather
conditions at low temperatures.
Central display range
Displayable content
In the central display area, the following set-
tings can be selected:
Shift lights
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The reduced display.
Trip data, refer to page 146.
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
With navigation system: route preview.
With navigation system: map view.
G-Meter, refer to page 148.
The entertainment.
Principle
Shift lights are temporarily displayed on the
instrument cluster and indicate the correct time
to upshift in order to achieve rapid accelera-
tion.
The Shift lights are active in M Manual mode
and can be shown on the instrument cluster or
Head-up display in combination with the tach-
ometer.
Augmented View.
145
Displays
CONTROLS
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-
mented View on the instrument cluster en-
ables the visualization of driver assistance
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-
ings.
Trip data
Principle
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-
imum distance to the preceding vehicle
when speed control systems are deacti-
vated.
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
▷
Android Auto©.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown on the control
display.
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, select functions of
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, e.g., map views.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
Some contents for the central display range
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display.
Display on the control display
Displayable content
Additional information:
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
Head-up display, refer to page 133.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
▷
▷
Configured interval for trip data displays.
The average fuel consumption depend-
ing on the configured interval.
Configuring the central display
range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
▷
▷
▷
The travel time depending on the con-
figured interval.
The distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
The distance traveled in coasting
mode.
1.
Press the Settings button on the
steering wheel.
Displaying trip data continuously
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
To display trip data permanently, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Live Vehicle" / "Adaptive content" / "Trip
data".
2. "CONTENT"
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
146
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-
matically reset approx. four hours after
the vehicle has come to a standstill.
"Since last refuel": the values are au-
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
"Since factory": the values since the
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played.
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.
Average consumption, arrow 2.
"Since Individual ()": the values since
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
Resetting average values manually
The average values of the trip data can be
reset manually:
An icon is displayed when coasting.
Total mileage, arrow 4.
▷
"since individ.".
Current consumption
Using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel:
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
1. Display trip data on the instrument cluster.
2.
Press and hold the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel until the values reset.
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted
and the engine continues to run when driving
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.
In this case, the internal combustion engine is
operated electrically.
To reset the average values via iDrive, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Time period for
trip data" / "Reset Individual".
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed in
the instrument cluster depending on how the
intervals for displaying trip data are configured.
"since individ.".
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
Assisted View
Principle
With Assisted View, information on the driver
assistance systems can be displayed on the
instrument cluster with a vehicle image.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Time period for trip data" / "Values".
Parking and maneuvering information is dis-
played in the Assisted View whenever the
parking assistance system is on.
2. Select the desired setting:
147
Displays
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Safety information
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
G-Meter
Principle
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
The values are automatically reset whenever
you start a new drive.
General
Additional information:
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-
played on the central display range.
Central display area, refer to page 145
Additional information:
Manually reseting G-Meter values
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
Central display area, refer to page 145
Display
2.
Press and hold the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel until the values reset.
Date and time
Various settings can be configured for display-
ing the date and time.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set man-
ually or automatically. Automatic time zone ad-
justment automatically updates the time, the
date, and the time zone as necessary.
An example of active Driver Assistance: the
indicator and warning lights for Distance Con-
trol and Assisted Driving Mode are displayed.
At the same time, the Distance Control is ani-
mated in Assisted View.
The date is set automatically based on the
time zone.
System limits
The detection capability of the Assisted View
system is limited.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Time".
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
2. Select the desired setting.
148
Displays
CONTROLS
Safety information
Fuel gauge
NOTICE
Principle
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel
promptly.
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Additional information:
Display
Refueling, refer to page 328.
The current range in the instru-
ment cluster is displayed as a
numerical value next to the fuel
gauge.
Display
Next to the fuel gauge in the
instrument cluster, an arrow be-
side the fuel pump icon shows
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler flap is on.
General information
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
The current range is displayed as numerical
value.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Setting the units of
measurement
Range
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
Principle
The range in the instrument cluster indicates
the distance that can still be covered with the
current tank of fuel.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /
"Units".
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
2. Select the desired setting.
149
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Driving.
Vehicle status
Coasting mode: "Efficient coasting"
"Charging battery"
Principle
With mild hybrid technology:
In the Vehicle status menu, the statuses can
be displayed or actions performed for several
systems such as for Check Control.
▷
Adaptive recuperation.
Depending on the situation, additional in-
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-
played.
Displaying vehicle status
To display the vehicle status, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Vehicle status".
▷
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 322.
Coasting, refer to page 323.
Overview
Functional requirements
Icon
Description
▷
Personal Mode or Efficient Mode drive
mode must be selected.
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of
the flat tire monitor, refer to
page 353.
▷
With Live Vehicle, the following settings
must be selected: "Adaptive content"
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 346.
Display
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 367.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 135.
"Service": display of the service
notifications, refer to page 151.
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
Current driving condition
Principle
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
Sport displays
Principle
The following states can be displayed:
The sport displays in the Live Vehicle menu
provide assistance for a sporty driving style.
150
Displays
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
Entering appointment dates
The dates for mandatory vehicle inspections
can be entered.
▷
Sport drive mode must be selected.
▷
With Live Vehicle, the following settings
must be selected: "Adaptive content"
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Display
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /
"Service" / "Vehicle inspection".
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
The following information is displayed:
2. Select the desired setting.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The torque.
The power.
The boost pressure.
The engine oil temperature.
Service
Principle
The service notifications indicate recom-
mended maintenance work.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A service advisor can read out the mainte-
nance work from the vehicle key.
Display
More information may be displayed on the
control display.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /
"Service".
Maintenance work as well as possible le-
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
2. Select the desired entry to bring up more
information.
151
Light and view
CONTROLS
Light and view
One-touch signaling
For one-touch signaling: Lightly tap the turn
signal lever up or down.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-
justed.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" / or
"Settings" / "One-touch turn signal".
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
2. Select the desired setting.
Turn signal
Brief flashing
To flash the turn signal briefly: Push the turn
signal lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Principle
The turn signal indicates the change in your
direction of travel. To indicate a turn, the fol-
lowing functions can be used:
High-beam headlights,
headlight flasher
▷
▷
▷
Flashing.
One-touch signaling.
Brief flashing.
Principle
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The high-beam headlights illuminate the road,
also at great distances. The headlight flasher
is used to emit a brief light signal by actuat-
ing the high-beam headlights. The high-beam
headlights can be switched on and off man-
ually at any time.
To ensure that the turn signal lamps on the
exterior mirror are clearly visible, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors while driving and while us-
ing the turn signals or hazard warning system.
Flashing
To flash the turn signal, push the turn signal
lever up or down past the resistance point.
152
Light and view
CONTROLS
High-beam headlights, turning
headlight flasher on/off
General information
In the low speed range, the high-beam head-
lights are not switched on by the Automatic
High Beam Assistant.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
the Automatic High Beam Assistant:
▷
▷
The automatic lights function is activated.
The low-beam headlights are turned on.
To turn on the high-beam headlights, push
the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1. The
high-beam headlights illuminate when the low-
beam headlights are switched on.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The Automatic High Beam Assistant can be
activated via iDrive:
To turn off the high-beam headlights or oper-
ate the headlight flasher, pull the turn signal
lever backward, arrow 2.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Headlights".
The blue indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the high-
beam headlights are turned on or the
headlight flasher is activated.
2.
Tap the High Beam Assistant button.
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam
headlights.
The green indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the low-
beam headlights are turned on.
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high-beam head-
lights.
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant promptly
detects other road users as well as the ambi-
ent lighting, e.g., in towns, and automatically
switches the high-beam headlights on or off
depending on the traffic situation.
If the Automatic High Beam Assistant is on
and you continue driving after an interruption,
the Automatic High Beam Assistant will re-
main on.
You may need to activate the Automatic High
Beam Assistant via iDrive before it can be
used. You can use the turn signal lever to tem-
porarily deactivate or activate the Automatic
High Beam Assistant, e.g., after turning your
high-beam headlights on/off manually.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deac-
tivated when the high-beam headlights are
switched on and off manually.
153
Light and view
CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. If
adjustments have been made and the sen-
sitivity has been modified, make sure that
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-
ually if required.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply
when adjusting the sensitivity of the Automatic
High Beam Assistant:
▷
Adjustment is possible only while your vehi-
cle is stationary.
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The light is switched off.
Increasing sensitivity
To increase the sensitivity of the Automatic
High Beam Assistant, push the turn signal
lever forward for approx. 10 seconds.
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1, or
pull the turn signal lever backward when the
high-beam headlights are on, arrow 2.
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the
turn signal lever is not possible.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
To reset the sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant, push the turn signal lever for-
ward again for approx. 10 seconds or switch off
drive-ready state.
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high-beam headlights. Therefore,
154
Light and view
CONTROLS
when appropriate, turn off the high-beam
headlights manually.
Overview
The system may not be fully operational in
the following situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
Buttons in the vehicle
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
The exterior lighting switch and buttons are
located on the turn signal lever, to the left of
the steering wheel.
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
Icon
Function
When the windshield in the area in front
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, etc.
Exterior lighting menu.
Low-beam headlights.
Automatic headlight control.
Exterior lighting off.
Exterior lighting
Principle
The exterior lighting comprises all lighting ele-
ments on the outside of the vehicle. The exte-
rior lighting, or individual functions of it, can be
operated using the buttons in your vehicle, the
buttons on your vehicle key, or via iDrive.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Functions via iDrive
Icon
Function
Automatic headlight control.
Low-beam headlights.
Exterior lighting off.
155
Light and view
CONTROLS
Function
Activate automatic headlight control
Icon
To activate the automatic lights, turn
the outer switch on the turn signal lever
downward.
Automatic High Beam Assistant.
Parking lights.
The LED under the automatic lights icon illumi-
nates.
The green indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the low-
beam headlights are turned on.
Left roadside parking light.
Right roadside parking light.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon
Function
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
Pathway lighting.
Low-beam headlights,
parking lights and roadside
parking lights
Driving lights automatic
Principle
The low-beam headlights are used to illumi-
nate the road without dazzling oncoming traf-
fic. The parking lights and roadside parking
lights are used to illuminate the vehicle when
stationary. These functions can be operated
using the buttons in the vehicle or via iDrive.
Principle
The automatic lights function switches the
low-beam headlights on or off automatically
depending on the ambient brightness, e.g., in
tunnels, at dusk, or with precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
Low-beam headlights
Turning on low-beam headlights
The automatic lights function is deactivated
if you turn on the low-beam headlights man-
ually.
To turn on the low-beam headlights,
turn the outer switch on the turn signal
lever upward.
The low-beam headlights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
156
Light and view
CONTROLS
The green indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the low-
beam headlights are turned on.
▷
Press the OFF button on the turn
signal lever.
▷
▷
Turn off the light via iDrive.
Switch on drive-ready state.
To turn on the low-beam headlights even
when standby state is switched on, turn the
outer switch on the turn signal lever upward
again.
When drive-ready state is turned on, the
automatic driving lights activate.
Turning off low-beam headlights
Depending on national-market version, the
low-beam headlights can be turned off as fol-
lows at low speeds:
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Parking lights".
▷
▷
Press the OFF button on the turn
signal lever.
Turn off the light via iDrive.
2.
Tap the roadside parking light button for
the desired side of the vehicle.
Parking lights
Welcome lights
General information
The parking lights can only be turned on at low
speeds.
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
Turning on parking lights
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Parking lights".
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
2.
Tap the parking lights button.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
The welcome light can be activated or deacti-
vated.
The green indicator light on the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the park-
ing lights are turned on.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Settings".
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
2. Select the desired setting, depending on
vehicle equipment:
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"
Turning off parking lights
The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
▷
"BMW Iconic Glow"
157
Light and view
CONTROLS
You can configure the radiator grille
lighting only when the vehicle is station-
ary and drive-ready state is off.
Switching pathway lighting on
You can turn on the pathway lighting as fol-
lows:
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
Turning on the welcome light
You can turn on the welcome light as follows:
▷
▷
Automatic activation when approaching.
Activation when unlocking vehicle.
▷
On the vehicle key, press and hold
the panic alarm button for approx. 1 second.
Setting the duration
You can configure the duration of pathway
lighting.
▷
With the vehicle locked, press the
lock button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Settings" / "Pathway lighting".
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
2. Select the desired setting.
Welcome Light Carpet
Daytime driving lights
Principle
The daytime driving lights are used to ensure
that the vehicle is more visible, e.g., in areas
with sharply changing light conditions.
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
Pathway lighting
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /
"Settings".
Principle
For the pathway lighting, the exterior light-
ing that illuminates the vehicle's surroundings
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle.
2. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version, select the desired
setting:
158
Light and view
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"
"Rear daytime driving lights"
"BMW Iconic Glow"
Adaptive headlight range
control
The Adaptive Headlight Range Control com-
pensates for vehicle acceleration, braking, and
load conditions to prevent your headlights from
dazzling oncoming traffic.
Adaptive lighting functions
Principle
The adaptive lighting functions provide dy-
namic illumination of the road.
Instrument lighting
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
Principle
The instrument lighting illuminates switches
and buttons with the individually set bright-
ness.
▷
Cornering light.
The brightness of the instrument lighting can
only be adjusted in darkness and when the
parking lights or low-beam headlights are
turned on.
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
To activate the adaptive lights, turn the
outer switch on the turn signal lever
downward.
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the instrument lighting can
be adjusted.
The LED on the turn signal lever illuminates.
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Cockpit brightness".
Cornering light
2. Select the desired setting.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
Interior lighting
Principle
The interior lighting comprises all lighting ele-
ments inside the vehicle. Depending on vehicle
equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights,
entry lights, ambient light, and speaker lighting
are controlled automatically.
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals. When
driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be
automatically switched on regardless of the
steering-wheel angle.
159
Light and view
CONTROLS
In the headliner, press the desired
reading light button.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
The reading lights can also can be turned on or
off via iDrive.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Reading light".
The interior lighting menu button is lo-
cated in the headliner.
2.
Select the icon for the desired seat
reading light.
The brightness of the reading lights can be
adjusted when they are turned on.
The buttons for reading lights are lo-
cated in the headliner.
Changing settings
Depending on vehicle equipment, the bright-
ness can be individually adjusted for specific
seats.
The interior light button is located in
the headliner.
Turning interior lights on/off
The interior lights can be turned on/off using
the button in the headliner.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Reading light".
Press the interior light button in the
headliner.
2. Tap the desired seat.
3. Select the desired settings.
To turn off the interior light permanently, press
and hold the button for approx. 3 seconds.
Ambient light
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
Principle
The interior lights can be turned on or off via
iDrive.
The ambient light comprises several light ele-
ments that provide diffuse light in the vehicle
interior. Depending on the vehicle equipment,
you can adjust the lighting level for some lights
via iDrive.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Reading light".
2.
Select the interior lights icon.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
To activate/deactivate the ambient light, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient
lighting" / "Ambient lighting".
Turning reading lights on/off
The reading lights can be turned on/off using
the button in the headliner.
160
Light and view
CONTROLS
To activate/deactivate this function, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient
lighting" / "Reduced for night driving".
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Speaker lighting
Principle
Selecting the color
You can choose the color of the ambient light
in Personal Mode.
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Turning speaker lighting on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Ambient lighting" / "Color".
2. Select the desired setting.
Window wiper system
Setting the brightness
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad-
justed.
Principle
The wiper system makes sure that you have a
clear view, e.g., in the rain. It is operated using
the wiper lever on the steering wheel.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Ambient lighting".
2. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"
3. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Warning
Dynamic light
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
With the Dynamic Light function, certain ac-
tions, e.g., incoming calls or obstacles detected
when opening door, are indicated by light ef-
fects. If the ambient light is disabled, the light
effects are still displayed.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /
"Ambient lighting" / "Lighting effects".
2. Select the desired setting.
NOTICE
Reduced lighting when driving at
night
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-
161
Light and view
CONTROLS
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the
window is dry.
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
To turn off the wipers or to activate flick wiping,
proceed as follows:
Turning on window wiper system
▷
To turn off: Push the wiper lever downward,
arrow 1, until position 0 is reached.
▷
To flick wipe: Push the wiper lever down-
ward from position 0, arrow 1, and push the
wiper lever forward to position 0 or position
1, arrow 2.
The wiper lever returns to its initial position
when released.
To turn on the wiper system, push the wiper
lever upward to the desired position.
Rain sensor
Principle
Position
Function
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind-
shield, directly in front of the interior mirror.
Position 0.
Position 1.
Position 2.
Position 3.
Rest position of wipers.
Rain sensor mode.
Normal wiper speed.
Fast wiper speed.
Safety information
NOTICE
When you continue driving after stopping with
the window wiper system on, the wipers will
operate at the previous setting.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
162
Light and view
CONTROLS
Activating rain sensor
Window washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the window washer
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
To activate the rain sensor: Push the wiper
lever upward from position 0, arrow 1, once.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
NOTICE
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
Deactivating rain sensor
To deactivate the rain sensor: Push the wiper
lever back to position 0.
Cleaning the windshield
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
To clean the windshield, pull the wiper lever
back.
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor,
turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever as
follows:
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield
directly in front of the wiper blade when the
wiper moves up.
▷
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to high,
turn the knurled wheel up.
▷
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to low,
turn the knurled wheel down.
163
Light and view
CONTROLS
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Rear wiper
Switching on the rear wiper
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
To turn on the rear wiper, rotate the outer
switch on the wiper lever upward.
Switch posi- Function
tion
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Position 0.
Position 1.
Rest position of the wiper.
Intermittent operation.
When reverse gear is en-
gaged, the system switches
to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
To clean the rear window, turn the outer switch
on the wiper lever as follows:
▷
▷
In rest position: Turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch returns to its rest posi-
tion when released.
In intermittent operation: Turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automatically
returns to its interval position when re-
leased.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid
reservoir fill level is low.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
164
Light and view
CONTROLS
Folding out the wipers
To fold the wipers away from the windshield,
proceed as follows:
1. Activate standby state.
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward and
hold it until the wipers stop in an approxi-
mately vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
Folding in the wipers
To fold in the wipers, proceed as follows:
1. Fold the wipers back in toward the wind-
shield.
2. Turn on standby state, then press the wiper
lever down or forward again and hold it.
The wipers return to their rest position and
are ready for operation.
165
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
Vehicle features and options Airbags
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Principle
The airbag system provides additional protec-
tion in the event of an accident, especially if the
seat belt is worn correctly.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
1
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
2
3
Front airbags
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
The front airbag helps protect the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact
in which the seat belts alone would not provide
adequate protection.
166
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep
the risk of injuring hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag deploys.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can cross over the steering wheel.
Select the settings so that the shoulder
rests against the backrest when crossing
the hands and the upper body is as far
back as possible while still maintaining a
comfortable grip on the steering wheel.
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
Knee airbag
The availability of the knee airbag depends on
the national-market version.
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
▷
▷
Keep the dashboard and windshield on the
passenger's side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive film or other coating, and do
not attach mounts for, e.g., navigation devi-
ces or mobile phones.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them, and do not
modify them in any way.
Warning
▷
▷
Do not use the front passenger's side air-
bag cover for storage.
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
Keep storage compartments near the air-
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or
center armrest.
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,
or other objects on the front seats unless
they are specifically designed for seats with
integrated airbags.
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as
jackets over the backrests.
To ensure that the airbag system has the opti-
mal protective effect, note the following:
Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to the dashboard,
steering wheel covers, and seats.
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Fasten seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.
167
Safety
CONTROLS
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
the airbags may still cause injury upon contact
in certain situations.
Malfunction
▷
The airbag system warning light on
the instrument cluster does not il-
luminate when drive-ready state is
on.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷
The airbag system warning light on the in-
strument cluster illuminates continuously.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle
checked immediately by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Additional warnings and information on the
airbags are also found on the sun visors.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
Setting the front seat positions
The power that deploys the driver's/front
passenger airbags depends on the position of
the driver's/front passenger seat.
Safety information
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Warning
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 101.
Warning
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
automatically
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Principle
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-
vation system can detect if the front passenger
seat is occupied.
The front passenger airbag is activated or de-
activated accordingly.
Display in the instrument cluster
The airbag system warning light on the
instrument cluster illuminates briefly
when drive-ready state is turned on,
thus indicating the operational readiness of the
entire airbag system and seat belt tensioners.
168
Safety
CONTROLS
as flat as possible against the rear seat
backrest.
Safety information
▷
Observe the maximum size of the child re-
straint system, for example to avoid possi-
ble touching the roof.
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Make sure that the front
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-
well.
Before transporting a child on the front pass-
enger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions in the section “Children on the
front passenger seat”.
Additional information:
Install child restraint systems, refer to page 114.
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag
The front passenger airbag indicator light in
the headliner shows the operating state of the
front passenger airbag.
Functional requirements
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-
enger seat are detected properly, the following
functional requirements apply:
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
The indicator light shows whether the airbag is
activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is turned on, the indi-
cator light illuminates briefly and then shows
whether the airbag is activated or deactivated.
▷
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
Display
Function
Sit upright in the seat with the back against
the backrest.
The indicator light is contin-
uously illuminated when the
seat is not occupied or when a
child is detected on the seat in
a provided child restraint sys-
tem as intended. The airbag
on the front passenger's side
is not activated.
Sit down with your feet touching the floor.
Installing child restraint systems
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-
enger seat are detected properly, note the fol-
lowing:
▷
When using child restraint systems, pay
close attention to the operating and safety
instructions provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer.
The indicator light does not il-
luminate when, for instance, a
correctly seated person of suf-
ficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbag on the front
passenger's side is activated.
▷
▷
Make sure that the seat surface of the child
restraint system rests as flat as possible on
the seat surface.
Move the head restraint up or remove it to
ensure that the child restraint system rests
When the front passenger seat is occupied,
check the indicator light in the headliner before
and while driving.
169
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to
page 192.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat
positions. In this case, the indicator light for
the front passenger airbag illuminates in the
headliner.
▷
▷
▷
The wrong way warning, refer to page 194.
No Turn on Red function, refer to page 195.
The Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 196.
The Intelligent Safety Systems can be acti-
vated or deactivated on the control display.
Some functions, e.g., warning times, can be
configured.
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbag activates and the
indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to establish the desired con-
dition, have the person sit in the rear seat.
Safety information
Occupancy detection
Warning
The occupant detection system satisfies the
legal requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates
the front passenger airbag under certain con-
ditions.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Collision warning systems
Principle
The Intelligent Safety systems can help pre-
vent an impending collision. To do so, the area
around the vehicle is monitored by various
sensors.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Depending on vehicle equipment, various
safety and warning systems are available:
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-
tervention, refer to page 171.
▷
▷
The exit warning, refer to page 181.
The Lane Departure Warning, refer to
page 183.
▷
▷
▷
The Lane Change Warning, refer to
page 186.
The side collision warning, refer to
page 189.
Sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
The rear-cCollision warning, refer to
page 191.
170
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Detection capability
The detection capability of the collision warn-
ing systems is limited.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
Activating/deactivating/adjusting
Intelligent Safety systems
1. To activate/deactivate Intelligent Safety
systems or configure settings, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
System limits of the sensors
The Intelligent Safety systems may be re-
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings".
2. Select the desired settings.
Additional information:
Depending on national-market version, some
Intelligent Safety Systems are automatically
activated whenever you start driving.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Forward Collision Mitigation
with brake intervention
Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
outbound delivery.
Principle
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention can help to prevent accidents within a
certain speed range. To do so, the area around
the vehicle is monitored by various sensors.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Reset
to recommended settings".
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
can help reduce the severity of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed. You can cancel automatic
brake intervention manually, e.g., by actively
moving the steering wheel.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Forward
Collision Mitigation system includes the follow-
ing functions:
▷
The Rear-end collision warning function,
refer to page 174.
▷
The oncoming traffic warning function, refer
to page 175.
171
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
The oncoming traffic warning function
when turning, refer to page 176.
Sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Forward
Collision Mitigation system is controlled by the
following sensors:
The pedestrian warning function, refer to
page 177.
The intersection warning function, refer to
page 179.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
The Evasion Assistant, refer to page 180.
Side radar sensors, front.
Forward Collision Mitigation can be activated
or deactivated on the control display. You can
also configure the warning time. Depending on
the detected risk of collision, various indicator
lights and warning lights are displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Speed range
The Forward Collision Mitigation system is-
sues a warning for a possible risk of collision
at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed
drops below this value again.
Activating/deactivating the Forward
Collision Mitigation
Automatic activation of system
Depending on national-market version, the
Forward Collision Mitigation is automatically
activated whenever you start driving.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Activating the system manually
The Forward Collision Mitigation is activated
by setting the warning time.
Additional information:
Set the warning time for Forward Collision Miti-
gation, refer to page 173.
Deactivating the system manually
Depending on national-market version, you
must significantly reduce your vehicle's speed
or stop your vehicle in order to deactivate
the Forward Collision Mitigation manually. For-
172
Safety
CONTROLS
ward Collision Mitigation is deactivated via
iDrive.
Icon
Meaning
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the right.
You may need to successively confirm deacti-
vation on the control display.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" /
"Forward Collision Mitigation" / "Off".
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the left.
General risk of collision.
Setting the warning time for
Forward Collision Mitigation
You can configure the warning time at which
Forward Collision Mitigation should issue a
warning.
Indicator lights and warning lights may be
displayed differently since the system has de-
tected multiple objects.
1. Go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Forward Collision Mitigation".
2. Select the desired setting.
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning
tone sounds.
The more sensitive the warning time is set to
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
The system checks for visual impairments. De-
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
and gaze behavior also affect the timing of
warnings.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Red warning light flashes:
Display in the instrument cluster
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Forward Collision Mitigation is shown on the
instrument cluster and, depending on vehicle
equipment, Head-up display by various indica-
tor lights and warning lights:
A warning signal sounds:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Icon
Meaning
Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of risk of imminent collision, the
system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
Risk of collision, for instance with an
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.
173
Safety
CONTROLS
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
Automatic brake intervention
If there is a risk of collision, the Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation system can assist with an auto-
matic brake intervention, if necessary.
System limits of the sensors
Forward Collision Mitigation may be restricted
by the system limits of the sensors.
Additional information:
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
Functional limitations
The Forward Collision Mitigation system may
be limited in the following situations:
Depending on the equipment and situation,
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
With limitation of the driving stability control
systems.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation
when towing.
System limits
Safety information
Warning function in rear-end
collision situations
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Principle
The rear-end collision function warns you of a
possible collision risk by displaying a warning
light on the instrument cluster. This system
also brakes automatically when necessary.
You can cancel automatic brake intervention
manually, e.g., by actively moving the steering
wheel.
Detection capability
The detection capability of the Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation is restricted.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
The time of warnings may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
174
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
With the rear-end collision warning function,
the following may not be detected or may be
detected only with a delay in the detection
range of the sensors, e.g.:
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range.
▷
▷
▷
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and being
approached at high speed.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Speed range
The rear-end collision warning function is acti-
vated when your vehicle speed is greater than
approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning function for
oncoming traffic
Display in the instrument cluster
Principle
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending
on vehicle equipment.
The oncoming traffic warning function warns
you of a possible risk of collision with oncom-
ing traffic by displaying a warning light on the
instrument cluster. This system also brakes
automatically when necessary. You can cancel
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by
actively moving the steering wheel.
Icon
Meaning
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General risk of collision.
The time of warnings may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
Warning function
The rear-end collision warning function issues
warnings on different levels, depending on
the respective hazard situation. This system
prompts the driver to intervene manually.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
175
Safety
CONTROLS
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range.
With the oncoming traffic warning function, the
following may not be detected or may be de-
tected only with a delay in the detection range
of the sensors, e.g.:
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Speed range
The oncoming traffic warning is activated
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning function for turning
with oncoming traffic
Principle
Display in the instrument cluster
The warning function for turning with oncom-
ing traffic warns you of a possible risk of col-
lision with oncoming traffic by displaying a
warning light on the instrument cluster. This
system also brakes automatically when nec-
essary. You can cancel automatic brake inter-
vention manually, e.g., by actively moving the
steering wheel.
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending
on vehicle equipment.
Icon
Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General risk of collision.
The time of warnings may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
Warning function
The oncoming traffic warning function issues
warnings on different levels, depending on
the respective hazard situation. This system
prompts the driver to intervene manually.
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake
intervention is triggered.
Additional information:
176
Safety
CONTROLS
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range.
With the warning function for turning with on-
coming traffic, the following may not be de-
tected or may be detected only with a delay in
the detection range of the sensors, e.g.:
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Speed range
The warning function for turning is activated
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning function for
pedestrians
This system reacts when your vehicle speed is
less than approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.
Principle
The Pedestrian Warning system warns you of
a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and
cyclists by displaying a warning light on the
instrument cluster. This system also brakes
automatically when necessary. You can cancel
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by
actively moving the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending
on vehicle equipment.
Icon
Meaning
The system issues warnings for speeds that
are common in towns and cities.
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning function for turning with oncom-
ing traffic issues warnings on different levels,
depending on the respective hazard. This sys-
tem prompts the driver to intervene manually.
Additional information:
177
Safety
CONTROLS
Icon
Meaning
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range on a straight road.
The Pedestrian Warning system issues warn-
ings on different levels, depending on the
respective hazard situation. This system
prompts the driver to intervene manually.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
In addition, the sensors detect the traffic situa-
tion in their detection range when turning.
Detection range
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Speed range
The Pedestrian Warning function is activated
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this system
reacts when your vehicle speed is less than
approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With the Pedestrian Warning, the sensor de-
tection range consists of the following:
▷
▷
From area in front of vehicle, arrow 1.
Display in the instrument cluster
If vehicle is equipped with front, side radar
sensors, side areas, arrows 2.
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is shown
on the instrument cluster and Head-up display,
depending on vehicle equipment.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
178
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-
sors to detect.
Speed range
The Intersection Warning is activated when
your vehicle speed is greater than approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning function at
intersections
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Principle
The Intersection Warning function warns you
of a possible risk of collision with crossing
traffic by displaying a warning light on the in-
strument cluster. This system also brakes au-
tomatically when necessary. You can cancel
automatic brake intervention manually, e.g., by
actively moving the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-
ment cluster and Head-up display, depending
on vehicle equipment.
Icon
Meaning
At intersections and junctions, this system is-
sues warnings for speeds that are common in
towns and cities.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the right.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the left.
The time of warnings may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The Intersection Warning system issues warn-
ings on different levels, depending on the
respective hazard. This system prompts the
driver to intervene manually.
Additional information:
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range.
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 171.
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
179
Safety
CONTROLS
Detection range
Safety information
With the Intersection Warning function, the fol-
lowing may not be detected or may be de-
tected only with a delay in the detection range
of the sensors, e.g.:
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the Evasion Assistant:
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
e.g. by buildings.
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions.
Sensors have detected sufficient clearance
around the vehicle.
Speed range
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver
when the vehicle speed is between approx.
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
Evasion Assistant
Principle
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear
suddenly. This system intervenes actively to
assist the driver if it is possible to make an
evasive maneuver to the side.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warning
light is shown on the instrument cluster and
Head-up display, depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
If the system detects sufficient free space
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-
form an evasive maneuver safely.
Icon
Meaning
The system warns the driver of a possible risk
of collision by displaying various warning lights
on the instrument cluster.
Warning when a vehicle is detected.
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-
cle.
Warning function with evasion
support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
The sensors monitor and detect the clearance
in front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehi-
cle equipment, the areas next to the vehicle
are also monitored.
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system is designed to provide assistance
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk
of collision.
180
Safety
CONTROLS
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-
play signals the evasion support.
A possible risk of collision is indicated by var-
ious warnings, e.g., warning light on the exte-
rior mirror and a warning tone.
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
warnings at different levels.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
With the Evasion Assistant, the following may
not be detected in the sensor detection range,
e.g.:
▷
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and being
approached at high speed.
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-
cle.
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
The Exit Warning can be activated or deacti-
vated on the control display.
The warning function can also be configured
depending on national-market version.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-
sors to detect.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional limitation
This system is deactivated when the trailer
power socket is occupied or trailer towing is
activated, e.g., when using a trailer or rear bi-
cycle rack.
Sensors
The Exit Warning is controlled by the following
sensors:
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped
with side front radar sensors.
Exit warning
Principle
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.
Activating/deactivating the exit
warning
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.
When opening doors, vehicle occupants are
then warned if a risk of collision with an ap-
proaching object is detected.
Automatic activation of system
The exit warning activates automatically
whenever you start driving if this function was
switched on when you completed your last trip.
181
Safety
CONTROLS
Deactivating the system manually
Displays
1. To deactivate the Exit Warning, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit
warning".
Warning light in exterior mirror
2. Select the desired setting.
Depending on national-market version, this
system activates automatically at the start of
every drive.
Configuring the exit warning
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
1. To configure the Exit Warning, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit
warning".
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, warnings are
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-
rior.
2. Select the desired setting.
Depending on national-market version, it may
not be possible to configure the warning func-
tion.
Warning function
Turning the warning signal on/off
Prewarning
To turn the Exit Warning tone on/off,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit
warning" / "Warning tone".
In the event of a prewarning for the Exit Warn-
ing, the warning light on the exterior mirror il-
luminates. Depending on the equipment, the
ambient light also flashes.
An object was detected in the opening area of
the doors. Increased awareness is required.
Depending on national-market version, the
warning tone cannot be turned off.
Acute warning
In the event of an acute Exit Warning, the
warning light on the exterior mirror flashes, as
does the ambient light, depending on vehicle
equipment. In addition, a warning tone sounds.
There is a risk of collision when opening the
doors.
182
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Detection range
With the Exit Warning, the following may not
be identified in the sensor detection range,
e.g.:
The sensors detect the traffic situation in their
detection range.
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.
Stationary or very slow objects.
Pedestrians.
The Lane Departure Warning can be activated,
deactivated and set on the control display.
Various warning functions from this system
help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.
Functional limitations
The exit warning system may be restricted in
the following situations:
If you set your turn signal for the correspond-
ing direction before leaving your lane, no warn-
ings are displayed.
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too
fast or too slow.
Safety information
▷
▷
In curves.
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering
wheel in response to a warning.
Lane Departure Warning
with active return
Principle
The Lane Departure Warning system with ac-
tive return alerts the driver when their vehicle is
about to leave the road or lane.
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
183
Safety
CONTROLS
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Lane
Departure Warning" / "Off".
Functional requirement
For the Lane Departure Warning to activate,
the camera must detect the lane boundary.
Setting Lane Departure Warning
The Lane Departure Warning menu can be
used to configure this function and specify
when it should issue warnings.
Speed range
The Lane Departure Warning is activated
when your vehicle exceeds a given minimum
speed. The minimum speed is country-specific
and displayed on the control display.
1. Go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Lane Departure Warning".
2. Select the desired setting.
Sensors
▷
"Expanded"
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Lane
Departure Warning system is controlled by the
following sensors:
If the system detects that your vehicle
is about to leave your lane or cross a
lane marking, a warning is issued. The
system performs a steering intervention.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
▷
"In dangerous situations"
Side radar sensors, front.
A warning is issued if the system de-
tects that the vehicle is about to inad-
vertently cross a lane marking, or if the
sensors detect an oncoming vehicle. A
steering intervention is performed.
Activating/deactivating the Lane
Departure Warning
Automatic activation of system
Depending on national-market version, the
system is automatically activated whenever
you start driving.
Depending on national-market version,
with continuous lane markings: If the
system detects that your vehicle is
about to inadvertently leave your lane
or cross a lane marking, a warning is
issued. A steering intervention is per-
formed.
Activating the system manually
The Lane Departure Warning is activated by
setting the warning time.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration
intensity, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".
Additional information:
Configuring the Lane Departure Warning, refer
to page 184.
Deactivating the system manually
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, you must successively confirm
deactivation of the Lane Departure Warning on
the control display.
2. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
184
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Steering intervention.
Warning tone.
Depending on national-market
version: activate/deactivate steering
intervention
Depending on national-market version, the
Lane Departure Warning steering intervention
can be activated or deactivated.
Steering wheel vibration
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Lane
Departure Warning" / "Steering intervention".
Additionally, a light is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
Steering intervention
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version: The Lane Departure Warning
system may intervene with an active steer-
ing intervention in addition to vibration if
you cross a lane marking at speeds up to
130 mph/210 km/h. The system supports the
driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on
the steering wheel and can be manually over-
ridden at any time.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, different warnings are dis-
played on the instrument cluster for the Lane
Departure Warning.
Icon
Meaning
Indicator light flashes green: System
is actively issuing a warning. If neces-
sary, the system performs a steering
intervention.
During an active steering intervention, a light is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
When flashing.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
With hazard warning system switched on.
In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
Warning function
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
General information
Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-
parture Warning system, depending on situa-
tion and speed:
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷
Indicator lights and warning lights on the
instrument cluster.
▷
Vibration of steering wheel.
185
Safety
CONTROLS
Additional information:
End of warning
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
The warning or active steering intervention will
be canceled in the following situations, for ex-
ample:
System limits
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
When returning to your own lane.
With hard accelerating or braking.
With hazard warning system switched on.
When flashing.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The Lane Departure Warning system may be
restricted in the following situations:
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.
When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
When no lane markings are detected.
When the system limits are reached.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
Warning signal
▷
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
A warning tone sounds if the driver does
not actively steer after the Lane Departure
Warning system has performed multiple active
steering interventions within one minute.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
The warning tone and Check Control message
advise the driver to pay closer attention to their
lane.
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
A Check Control message may be displayed
on the instrument cluster when this system is
not functioning properly. A yellow warning light
also illuminates on the instrument cluster, de-
pending on national-market version.
The longer warning tone is stopped if the
driver takes control of the steering.
With trailer towing
When the Lane Departure Warning is acti-
vated, no steering intervention is performed if
the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer
towing is activated, e.g., when using a trailer.
Active Blind Spot Detection
with active return
If using a rear carrier, e.g., a rear bicycle rack,
on the trailer hitch, this restriction does not
apply when trailer towing is activated on the
control display.
Principle
The Lane Change Warning system with active
return detects vehicles in your blind spot or ve-
186
Safety
CONTROLS
hicles approaching from behind in the adjacent
lane.
Speed range
Active Blind Spot Detection is activated when
your vehicle exceeds a given minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-
ous warnings, e.g., signaled by warning light
on the exterior mirror.
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
This system is temporarily deactivated
at speeds greater than approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
Activating/deactivating the Lane
Change Warning
1. To activate/deactivate Active Blind Spot
Detection, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Active Blind Spot Detection".
The sensors monitor the area behind and next
to the vehicle.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
2. Select the desired setting.
The system will warn in the previously named
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-
ing light on the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates at the set intensity.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Blind Spot Detection ac-
tivates automatically whenever you start driv-
ing.
Active Blind Spot Detection can be activated,
deactivated, and configured on the control dis-
play.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
1. To configure Active Blind Spot Detec-
tion, go through the menu as fol-
Safety information
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Active Blind Spot Detection".
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
2. Select the desired setting.
Active Blind Spot Detection is controlled by the
following sensors:
You can configure how many warnings will be
shown. However, there may also be an excess
of unwarranted warnings of critical situations.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Side radar sensors, rear.
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped
with side front radar sensors.
187
Safety
CONTROLS
Acute warning
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration
intensity, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".
When an acute warning is issued by Active
Blind Spot Detection, the steering wheel vi-
brates briefly. The warning light in the exterior
mirror flashes brightly.
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
2. Select the desired setting.
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
Depending on national-market
version: activate/deactivate steering
intervention
Depending on national-market version, the
Lane Change Warning steering intervention
can be activated or deactivated.
Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area.
Steering intervention
Depending on national-market version: The
Active Blind Spot Detection system may per-
form an active steering intervention when
there is no response to the steering wheel
vibration and a lane marking is crossed at
speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h. The steer-
ing intervention helps return the vehicle into
the lane. The steering intervention can be no-
ticed on the steering wheel and can be man-
ually overridden at any time.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Active
Blind Spot Detection" / "Steering intervention".
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The steering intervention is carried out from
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display.
With trailer towing
No steering intervention is performed when the
trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-
ing is activated. Active Blind Spot Detection
does not issue a pre-warning.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, an acute warning will continue
to be issued if there is a risk of collision.
Prewarning
In the event of a prewarning for Active Blind
Spot Detection, the dimmed warning light on
the exterior mirror indicates when vehicles are
in your blind spot or approaching from the rear.
The warning function may be restricted. Warn-
ings can be displayed late or not at all, e.g., if
the speed of the approaching vehicle is much
higher than your own speed. An increased
188
Safety
CONTROLS
number of unwarranted warnings may occur.
A Check Control message is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
also illuminates on the instrument cluster, de-
pending on national-market version.
This system may be restricted or deactivated
when the trailer power socket is occupied or
trailer towing is activated, e.g., when using a
trailer or rear bicycle rack. A Check Control
message is displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
Warning light flashing
As a self-test of Active Blind Spot Detection,
the warning light on the exterior mirror flashes
briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.
System limits
Side collision mitigation
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Principle
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision.
Functional limitations
The Lane Change Warning system may be re-
stricted in the following situations:
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-
lision. To do so, the system issues a warning
by flashing the warning light on the exterior
mirror, issuing a Check Control message, and
vibrating the steering wheel.
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
If necessary, an active steering intervention is
performed by the system.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
The sensors monitor the space next to the ve-
hicle.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
The side-collision warning can be activated
or deactivated on the control display. The se-
verity of the steering wheel vibration can be
adjusted.
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
A Check Control message may be displayed
on the instrument cluster when this system is
not functioning properly. A yellow warning light
189
Safety
CONTROLS
Functional requirement
The camera behind the windshield determines
the lane boundary positions.
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Side Collision Warning infor-
mation is displayed in the Assisted View on the
instrument cluster.
For the side-collision warning with steering in-
tervention to activate, the camera must detect
the lane boundary.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
Speed range
Warning function
The side-collision warning function is activated
when your vehicle exceeds a given minimum
speed. The minimum speed is country-specific
and displayed on the control display.
Warning light in exterior mirror
This system responds when your vehicle
speed is less than approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
Sensors
The side-collision warning is controlled by the
following sensors:
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the side-
collision warning
1. To activate/deactivate the Side Collision
Warning, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Side Collision Protection".
Acute warning
In the event of an acute side-collision warning,
the warning light on the exterior mirror flashes
and the steering wheel begins to vibrate if
there is a risk of collision.
A Check Control message is displayed on the
instrument cluster at the same time.
2. Select the desired setting.
Steering intervention
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration
intensity, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".
Depending on the national-market version,
if necessary, the system engages the active
steering intervention to prevent a collision and
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
2. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
190
Safety
CONTROLS
PreCrash functions are triggered where appli-
cable if a vehicle approaching at a certain
speed is detected.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The side-collision warning system may be re-
stricted in the following situations:
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-
cle.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
The rear-end collision preparation function is
activated automatically when you start driving
and is deactivated automatically in certain sit-
uations.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed on
the instrument cluster when this system is not
functioning properly.
Sensors
The rear-end collision preparation function is
controlled by the side, rear radar sensors.
This system is deactivated when the trailer
power socket is occupied or trailer towing is
activated, e.g., when using a trailer or rear
bicycle rack. A Check Control message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Activating/deactivating the rear-
collision warning
The rear-collision warning is automatically ac-
tivated whenever you start driving.
The system is deactivated in the following sit-
uations:
Rear-end collision
preparation
▷
▷
When reversing.
When the trailer power socket is occupied
or trailer towing is activated, e.g., when us-
ing a trailer or rear bicycle rack.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
Depending on the national-market version, the
hazard warning flashers are switched on and
191
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional requirement
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or
light signal systems.
Functional limitations
The rear-collision warning may be restricted if
the speed of the approaching vehicle is much
higher or similar to your own speed.
Various traffic signs are taken into account for
the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:
Sign Meaning
Traffic Light And Sign
Warning
Give way signs:
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
Principle
Stop signs:
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides
support in situations in which the right-of-way
needs to be yielded based on road signs or
traffic lights.
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
When traffic lights are red, a pre-
warning and an acute warning will be
issued.
This system uses a camera to analyze traffic
signs and traffic lights. The navigation system
directs information on the road layout to the
system.
Speed range
For warning purposes, the respective traffic sit-
uation, for example, is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster. An acoustic signal also sounds in
acute warning situations.
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system
issues a warning as from a variable mini-
mum speed and at speeds up to approx.
60 mph/100 km/h.
A warning is given if the right of way is about
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-
tions:
Sensors
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning is control-
led by the camera behind the windshield.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.
At a road entrance.
Activating/deactivating the Traffic
Light And Sign Warning
1. To activate/deactivate the Traffic Light And
Sign Warning, go through the menu as
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety
and warnings" / "Traffic Light and Sign
Warning".
On a highway entrance ramp.
At a roundabout.
With a red traffic light.
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning can be ac-
tivated or deactivated on the control display.
You can also configure the warning time.
2. Select the desired setting.
192
Safety
CONTROLS
Setting the warning time for the
Traffic Light And Sign Warning
Icon
Meaning
Give way.
1. To configure the warning time for the Traf-
fic Light And Sign Warning, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /
"Safety and warnings" / "Traffic Light and
Sign Warning".
Stop.
Red traffic light.
2. Select the desired setting.
The selected setting is saved and adopted for
the next journey.
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Warning function
General information
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system is-
sues warnings in two levels.
Acute warning
If an acute warning is issued for the Traffic
Light And Sign Warning because there is a risk
that a vehicle is not yielding the right-of-way, a
signal tone sounds and an icon is displayed on
the instrument cluster:
In the event of a prewarning, the system issues
a warning by means of an icon on the instru-
ment cluster.
In the event of an acute warning, the system
issues a warning by displaying an icon on the
instrument cluster and sounding an acoustic
signal.
Icon
Meaning
Red traffic light.
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-
tual driving situation and the warning time set-
ting.
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Prewarning
If a prewarning is issued for the Traffic Light
And Sign Warning because there is a risk that
a vehicle is not yielding the right-of-way, an
icon is displayed on the instrument cluster:
Display in the Head-up display
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Traffic
Light And Sign Warning is displayed simulta-
neously on the Head-up display and instru-
ment cluster.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
193
Safety
CONTROLS
No warning
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning does not
issue a warning in the following situations, for
example:
Wrong way warning
Principle
The wrong way warning warns the driver of
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-
way streets.
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal
systems.
▷
With intersections with relevant traffic lights
that are illuminated yellow or green.
The system uses sensors and, depending on
vehicle equipment, navigation data and traffic
signs to monitor the traffic situation.
Functional limitations
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system
may be limited in the following situations:
For warning purposes, a corresponding traffic
sign is displayed on the instrument cluster and
an acoustic signal sounds.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
Functional requirement
The road layout ahead must be controlled
clearly with traffic signs.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
The Wrong Way Warning system recognizes
the following traffic signs, for example:
When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.
Roundabout.
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Direction arrows for required passing ma-
neuver.
With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
Sensors
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
The Wrong Way Warning function is controlled
by the camera behind the windshield.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
Activating/deactivating the wrong
way warning
Depending on national-market version, the
wrong way warning is automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
In some regions, the system may not be
available or only partially available.
194
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
Warning function
The Wrong Way Warning is displayed
It may not be possible to use the system in
all regions.
and an acoustic signal sounds when
your vehicle is traveling in the wrong di-
rection on a highway, roundabout, or one-way
street, for example.
No Turn on Red function
Warnings are displayed on the instrument
cluster and, depending on vehicle equipment,
on the Head-up display.
Principle
The No Turn on Red function assists the driver
by indicating at which traffic lights turning on
red is prohibited.
System limits
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights
and traffic signs using the camera behind the
windshield. In addition, the navigation system
data is used.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
No warning
For example, the wrong way warning system
does not issue warnings for roadways without
traffic signs.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
the No Turn on Red function:
Functional limitations
The wrong way warning system may be re-
stricted in the following situations, for example,
and will either output an incorrect wrong way
warning or no warning at all:
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and
traffic signs.
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m
from the traffic lights.
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-
cealed or soiled.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Traf-
fic Light And Sign Warning is activated.
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-
tated.
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.
Sensors
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
The No Turn on Red function is controlled by
the camera behind the windshield.
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
Display in the instrument cluster
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
If the driver approaches a red traffic
light with a traffic sign that prohibits
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
195
Safety
CONTROLS
The indicator light goes out automatically after
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.
9 mph/15 km/h.
The driver can manually cancel the Emergency
Stop Assistant at any time.
Safety information
System limits
Warning
General information
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The No Turn on Red function may be limited in
the following situations, for example:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the Emergency Stop Assistant:
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated
via iDrive.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
The system is activated from a speed of
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver
activity.
With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
Activating/deactivating Emergency
Stop Assistant
To activate/deactivate triggering of the Emer-
gency Stop Assistant, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Emergency stop".
In some regions, this function may not be
completely available or not available at all.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Triggering the Emergency Stop
Assistant
If the Emergency Stop Assistant detects that
the driver is no longer driving their vehicle
safely or is ignoring warnings, the system is
triggered automatically. The triggered system
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Principle
The Emergency Stop Assistant assists the
driver if they are no longer able to drive their
vehicle safely. When the system is triggered,
the vehicle is brought to a stop in its own lane
by the lane keeping system.
Triggering of the Emergency Stop Assistant
can be enabled or disabled on the control dis-
play.
An immediate emergency call can be triggered
on the control display.
196
Safety
CONTROLS
The following is performed automatically when
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:
Display in the instrument cluster
When triggered, the Emergency Stop Assistant
is shown on the instrument cluster.
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-
ter.
Icon
Meaning
▷
The system takes over vehicle handling un-
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.
The Emergency Stop Assistant has
triggered.
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.
An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
System limits
The Emergency Stop Assistant does not re-
lease the driver from their obligation to drive
safely in traffic.
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be
triggered via voice input.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 56.
This system may be restricted in the following
situations:
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
Canceling Emergency Stop
Assistant
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant at any point by taking active control of
driving the vehicle.
▷
When wearing sunglasses with high protec-
tion against infrared light.
Cross Traffic Warning with
brake intervention
The system is stopped by the following ac-
tions, for example:
▷
▷
By firmly pressing the accelerator pedal.
By stopping the system on the control dis-
play.
Principle
The Cross Traffic Warning with brake interven-
tion helps the driver by providing visual and
acoustic warnings when driving through con-
fusing exits or pulling out of perpendicular
parking spaces.
▷
▷
▷
▷
By operating the turn signal.
By turning off the hazard warning system.
By firmly countersteering.
By changing the selector lever position
when the vehicle was already at a stand-
still.
The system detects road users approaching
from the side earlier than would be possible
from the driver’s seat.
If there is a risk of collision when reversing, this
system provides assistance by performing an
automatic brake intervention.
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the Emer-
gency Stop Assistant will apply the following
settings:
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
The interior lights are switched on.
The central locking system is unlocked.
197
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.
Depending on whether vehicle is equipped
with side front radar sensors.
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake
intervention to switch on automatically.
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehi-
cle.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
2. Select the desired setting, depending on
vehicle equipment:
The system displays a warning light on the
exterior mirror, for example, when other road
users are approaching.
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"
"Front and rear warning"
"Brake intervention at rear"
The Cross Traffic Warning can be activated or
deactivated on the control display.
Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
The cross traffic warning must be activated on
the control display. The system turns on auto-
matically as soon as Park Distance Control or a
camera view activates and you engage a gear
position.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The Cross Traffic Warning switches off auto-
matically in the following situations, for exam-
ple:
Sensors
▷
▷
When walking speed is exceeded.
The Cross Traffic Warning is controlled by the
following sensors:
When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
198
Safety
CONTROLS
Display in camera view
Warning function
General information
With the Cross Traffic Warning, the control dis-
play shows the corresponding view, an acous-
tic signal may sound, and the warning light on
the exterior mirror flashes.
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Depending on the direction of travel, the view
to the front or back is displayed in the camera
image.
Visual warning
Warning light in exterior mirror
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning of the Cross
Traffic Warning function, an acoustic signal
sounds if your vehicle moves in the corre-
sponding direction.
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
System limits
System limits of the sensors
The Cross Traffic Warning may be restricted by
the system limits of the sensors.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
The Cross Traffic Warning system may be re-
stricted in the following situations:
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
199
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
If the trailer power socket is occupied or
trailer towing is activated, the cross traffic
warning is not available for the area behind
the vehicle.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
BMW Drive Recorder
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic. To do so, you
must activate the system on the control display
before using it for the first time.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Data protection
You can use the control display to configure
video recording settings such as recording type
and duration.
The BMW Drive Recorder is permitted to re-
cord and evaluate video recordings in accord-
ance with the statutory regulations of the
country in which the system is to be used. The
user is responsible for the use of the system
and compliance with respective applicable reg-
ulations.
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
Automatic storage of recordings makes it
possible to document the vehicle accident
or theft using the corresponding recording
type configured.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory
restrictions on using the system in your region
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the
laws with respect to use of the system should
be verified in regular intervals, especially when
borders are frequently crossed.
▷
Saving recordings manually helps you
document traffic situations using your set
recording type.
Depending on vehicle equipment, video re-
cordings can be saved directly to a mobile de-
vice, e.g., a smartphone or USB stick.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, you should in-
form others about the system when giving
them the vehicle.
Assistance system cameras are used to re-
cord, e.g., panorama view cameras.
In addition, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the BMW Drive Recorder:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.
Time.
Speed.
▷
Standby or drive-ready state is switched
on.
GPS coordinates.
▷
▷
The BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.
200
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The recording type has been selected.
gered. Recordings are stored depending on
the setting selected for recording duration.
The recording duration has been selected.
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-
sage is sent to the My BMW App.
The following functional requirements apply
when using the theft alert:
After saving the recording, the reduced
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-
bile device.
▷
The theft notification was activated in the
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-
corder menu.
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile
device.
Starting/stopping manual recording
▷
▷
The My BMW app is linked to the Connect-
edDrive account.
Using the button
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
You must activate the BMW Drive Recorder on
the control display before using the recording
function for the first time.
1. Go to the Apps menu.
2. "All"
To start a manual recording with the
BMW Drive Recorder, press and hold
the parking assistance button on the
center console.
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept the Privacy Policy.
5. "Settings"
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
Recordings are made for the set recording du-
ration or can be ended manually on the control
display.
Recording functions
Via iDrive
Starting/stopping an automatic
recording
If the vehicle sensors detect an accident or
theft, the BMW Drive Recorder starts recording
automatically and then saves this recording.
To start recording with BMW Drive Recorder in
the vehicle, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" / "Start
recording" / "Vehicle".
Recordings are made for the set recording du-
ration and can be stopped manually by rese-
lecting the menu item on the control display.
▷
In the event of an accident, the BMW Drive
Recorder saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
▷
In the event of theft, the BMW Drive Re-
corder saves recordings after being trig-
201
Safety
CONTROLS
Recording playback and
administration
Video recordings saved by the BMW Drive Re-
corder can be played, exported, and deleted.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
the BMW Drive Recorder when recording on a
mobile device:
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.
The BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
For your own safety, video recordings are
only shown on the control display if the ve-
hicle speed is below approx. 2 mph/3 km/h.
Depending on national-market version, video
recordings are only shown when the parking
brake is applied or selector lever position P is
engaged.
To send recordings to a mobile device, the fol-
lowing functional requirements apply for the
BMW Drive Recorder:
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, pair a
mobile device with the vehicle via Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth audio, or connect a USB stick.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" / "Record
-ings".
▷
▷
▷
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile
device.
2. Select the desired recording.
3. If necessary, select the camera.
The My BMW app is linked to the Connect-
edDrive account.
The My BMW App is permitted to access
your photo library.
Settings
Recording type
Starting/ending recording
1. To select the recording type for BMW Drive
Recorder, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /
"Settings".
To start recording with BMW Drive Recorder
on a mobile device, go through the menu as
follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /
"Start recording" / "USB/My BMW app".
2. Select the desired setting.
Recordings can be stopped manually by rese-
lecting the menu item on the control display.
Recording time
1. To configure the recording time for BMW
Drive Recorder, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive
Recorder" / "Settings".
Cameras
You can select any camera of the BMW Drive
Recorder.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /
"Settings" / "Camera selection".
2. Select the desired setting.
Recording on a mobile device
General information
Depending on national-market version, the
storable video length depends on the mobile
device's available storage space.
2. Select your desired camera.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, the BMW
Drive Recorder may not be able to store re-
cordings if the damage to the vehicle is too
great or the power supply was interrupted.
202
Safety
CONTROLS
With USB sticks that have been repeatedly
overwritten, it may only be possible to export
recordings in a limited manner.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic brake intervention by Forward
Collision Mitigation.
Brake power assistance provided by For-
ward Collision Mitigation.
The preferred file system for USB storage is
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.
Detection of an impending rear collision by
the Rear-collision warning.
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system
has been triggered.
Safety information
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be
established, theft alerts and video downloads
may be restricted or not available.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects
whether recordings can be saved on your
smartphone. This function may be restricted or
not available if the connection is weak.
Active Protection
Principle
PreCrash functions
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
situations.
Depending on vehicle equipment and require-
ments, Active Protection activates the follow-
ing individual functions in critical driving situa-
tions:
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.
The windows remain open with a small
gap.
Active Protection is used to detect certain criti-
cal driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷
▷
Automatic closing of glass sunroof.
Automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
Systems can be returned to the desired set-
tings following a critical driving situation with-
out accident.
General information
Certain functions of some vehicle systems can
lead to Active Protection being triggered within
their system limits:
PostCrash iBrake
Principle
In certain accident situations, PostCrash iBrake
can automatically bring the vehicle to a stop
without any need for the driver to intervene.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision.
203
Safety
CONTROLS
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Safety information
The driver can intervene manually to brake the
vehicle more sharply or cancel automatic brak-
ing with PostCrash iBrake.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher
than the brake pressure generated by auto-
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-
Crash iBrake is canceled.
Break recommendation
Function
Abort automatic braking
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.
After starting a journey, the break recommen-
dation function is trained to the driver, enabling
it to detect decreasing alertness or fatigue.
This process takes the following criteria into
account:
Automatic braking can be canceled by doing
as follows:
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav-
ior.
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly
longer.
Driving conditions, e.g., the time or duration
of the drive.
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for
slightly longer.
Depending on vehicle equipment, informa-
tion from the Driver Attention Camera.
This function activates at speeds greater than
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display
a break recommendation.
Fatigue alert
Principle
Setting break recommendation
The Distraction Warning from the Fatigue Alert
system can be turned on or off or configured.
The Fatigue Alert system can detect when the
driver is less alert using various criteria.
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation func-
tion can detect driver fatigue, e.g., during long,
monotonous trips. This function recommends
taking a break as necessary. A message will
appear on the control display.
1. Go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Fatigue Alert".
The break recommendation can be adjusted
on the control display.
2. Select the desired setting.
Despite this function being off, some driver as-
sistance systems may issue break recommen-
dations.
204
Safety
CONTROLS
Display
Functional requirements
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, the
Fatigue Alert system displays a message on
the control display, recommending the driver to
take a break.
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
The steering wheel and driver’s seat height
must be adjusted so that the entire instrument
cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Atten-
tion Camera to record the driver’s entire face.
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
Overview
System limits
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If
the system is limited, either no warning may
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be
issued.
The break recommendation function may be
limited in the following situations:
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment cluster may have some infrared light
sources. Depending on the light conditions,
these light sources can be visible when the
vehicle is in standby mode.
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
In active driving situations such as when
changing lanes frequently.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
operational in the following situations:
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷
When wearing sunglasses with high protec-
tion against infrared light.
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
The Driver Attention Camera is a camera on
the instrument cluster. The camera monitors
the driver’s activity and direction of view, de-
pending on vehicle equipment.
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,
by evaluating their head position and eyes.
205
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.
Additional information:
To make full use of braking assistance, do not
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during
full braking.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Antilock Braking System
Dynamic Stability Control
Principle
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels during the braking process.
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep your ve-
hicle safely on the road in critical driving situa-
tions. The drive power is reduced depending
on the situation, and wheels can be braked
individually. This system can be activated or
deactivated via My Modes.
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-
ing full braking, which increases active driving
safety.
The Antilock Braking System activates auto-
matically whenever drive-ready state is turned
on.
Dynamic Stability Control will detect the follow-
ing unstable driving conditions, for example:
▷
Skidding at the vehicle rear, which can lead
to oversteering.
Malfunction
The Antilock Braking System warning
light illuminates continuously on the in-
strument cluster if the system is not
operational.
▷
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-
ble.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
Steerability is limited during full braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
206
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Displays in the instrument cluster
If the Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Overview
If the OFF indicator light for Dynamic
Stability Control illuminates, the system
is deactivated.
If the warning light for Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control flashes, the system is regu-
lating the drive and brake power. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce the vehicle speed
and adjust your driving style to the road condi-
tions.
The My Modes button located on the
center console.
If the warning light for Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control illuminates, the system has
failed or is initializing. Driving stabiliza-
tion is restricted or has failed.
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is limited when accelerating and
cornering.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
1.
Press the My Modes button on the
center console.
2. "SPORT"
The last Dynamic Stability Control setting
Setting for increased driving
dynamics
Principle
For a more dynamic driving experience, you
can increase the driving dynamics via My
Modes.
applied in this mode is activated.
3.
Tap the settings icon as necessary.
4. "Driving dynamics"
5. "DSC OFF"
Dynamic Stability Control, and thus driving sta-
bility, are limited while accelerating and corner-
ing.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Dynamic Stability Control activates automati-
cally when you switch to another drive mode.
207
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
nates when increased driving dynamics is acti-
vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Increased driving dynamics deactivates auto-
matically in the following situations, for exam-
ple:
▷
▷
When Distance Control is activated.
In case of a brake intervention by For-
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.
The My Modes button for activat-
ing/deactivating increased driving dy-
namics is located on the center con-
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
sole.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention, refer to page 171.
Functional requirement
To increase driving dynamics, you must se-
lect the following drive mode via My Modes:
"SPORT".
Drive-off support
Activating/deactivating increased
driving dynamics
Principle
Drive-off support provides the best possible
traction when driving off in certain situations,
e.g., on difficult surfaces like snow or sand.
1.
To activate/deactivate increased
driving dynamics, press the My Modes but-
ton on the center console.
This function ensures maximum drive power at
low speeds with adapted driving stability.
2. "SPORT"
The last Dynamic Stability Control setting
Activating/deactivating the drive-off
support
To activate/deactivate drive-off support, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain and
chassis" / "Activate drive-off support once".
applied in this mode is activated.
3.
Select the settings icon.
4. "Driving dynamics"
5. "SPORT PLUS"
Increased driving dynamics is activated.
Drive-off support remains on until it is deacti-
vated or the driving mode is changed.
Dynamic Stability Control automatically reacti-
vates when changing to another drive mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument cluster
If drive-off support is activated, the
drive-off support indicator light illumi-
nates on the instrument cluster.
The Dynamic Stability Control indicator
light on the instrument cluster illumi-
208
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Hill Descent Control".
BMW xDrive
Hill Descent Control is automatically disabled
at speeds above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system
of the vehicle. The interplay between BMW
xDrive and other suspension control systems
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-
hicle speed, the following functions are deacti-
vated:
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.
Active Park Distance Control emergency
braking.
Additional information:
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-
tervention, refer to page 171.
Hill Descent Control
▷
Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 253.
Principle
Hill Descent Control is a downhill control fea-
ture for vehicles with all-wheel drive. This fea-
ture adjusts the vehicle speed on steep down-
hill gradients, e.g., when driving on unpaved
roads.
Display in the instrument cluster
The set speed is displayed on
the instrument cluster together
with the indicator light for Hill
Descent Control.
When Hill Descent Control is on, the vehicle
moves at the speed set by the driver, without
the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
▷
The display illuminates green
when the system is on. Hill
Descent Control decelerates
the vehicle.
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the
speed, it automatically distributes the brake
power to the individual wheels. Driving stability
and steerability are improved. If necessary, the
Antilock Braking System prevents the wheels
from locking.
▷
The display illuminates gray when the sys-
tem is in standby.
Hill Descent Control can be enabled at speeds
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Display in the Head-up display
The status of Hill Descent Control can also be
shown on the Head-up display.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
While driving downhill, this system reduces the
vehicle speed to the set value, as physically
possible.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Hill Descent Control provides assistance when
driving in selector lever positions D, N, and R.
Using the rocker button for cruise
control
Enabling/disabling Hill Descent
Control
To activate/deactivate Hill Descent Control,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
The desired speed for Hill Descent
Control can be set using the rocker but-
ton on the left of the steering wheel.
209
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Press the rocker button up or down to grad-
ually increase or decrease the set speed.
fort by reducing the necessary steering ef-
fort.
Press the rocker button up/down and hold
it until the desired speed is reached.
▷
The wheel angle is reduced in situations
that require minor or rapid corrections of
the direction of travel when driving at higher
speeds, e.g., swerving quickly or correcting
for crosswinds. In these cases, the variable
sports steering increases driving stability
when moving the steering wheel.
Using the brake pedal
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-
hicle speed, the set speed can be decreased
by depressing the brake pedal.
Malfunction
If the Hill Descent Control malfunctions, a
Check Control message is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering
support.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes parking easier, for example,
and makes the steering firmer when driving at
faster speeds.
The steering force is adapted to the drive
mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a com-
fortable steering response.
Variable sport steering
The variable sports steering enables direct,
agile handling with little steering effort. The
variable sports steering responds independ-
ently of the current speed, varying the steering
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.
▷
In situations that require large movements
of the steering wheel, e.g., when maneu-
vering or turning, even minor movements of
the steering wheel will result in a greater
wheel steering angle. As a result, the varia-
ble sports steering increases steering com-
210
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
Applying current speed as the
speed warning
To apply the current speed as a Speed Warn-
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Speed
warning" / "Adopt current speed".
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Speed Limit Info
Speed warning
Speed Limit Info
Principle
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
Speed Limit Info uses a camera near the in-
terior rearview mirror to detect road signs at
the edge of the road as well as overhead sign
posts.
General information
Another speed warning is given when the set
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
Speed Limit Info may also show speed limits
that apply to routes that are not signposted if
the navigation system has current map data.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
To activate/deactivate the Speed Warning,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Speed
warning".
General information
Traffic signs with subplates are analyzed and
compared with the vehicle's on-board data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
Adjusting the speed
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
1. To set the speed, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and
warnings" / "Speed warning".
For information on the current map version
and the driver assistance map, see “Driver as-
sistance map” under “Navigation system”.
2. Select the desired setting.
Without map data, the system is subject to
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with
speed limitations are detected and displayed
211
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-
played.
Display
Speed Limit Info
Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed
when the trailer socket is occupied or trailer
towing was activated via iDrive.
Icon
Description
Current speed limit.
Depending on the national-
market version, it is possible
to switch between the units of
measurement.
Depending on the equipment, an approved
maximum speed can be set up for trailer tow-
ing, which will be taken into account for the
display of speed limits.
Additional information:
No data on current speed limit
available.
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Speed Limit Info not available.
▷
Trailer towing, refer to page 313.
Safety information
Warning signals
Warning
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded
or the speed limit changes. The display also
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Settings
Individual settings can be configured for Speed
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed
changes.
1. To configure the settings for Speed Limit
Info, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed
Limit Assistant"
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
2. Select the desired setting.
212
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Speed control system information is displayed
on the instrument cluster.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the speed
control systems include the following individual
systems:
▷
Camera, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
Speed Limit Info may be restricted and pro-
vide incorrect information in the following sit-
uations:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise Control, refer to page 215.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 231.
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the individual systems are en-
hanced with additional functions.
In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data.
Some functions can be operated via voice con-
trol.
If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable.
Additional information:
When roads deviate from the navigation
such as due to changes in road layout.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 56.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Safety information
When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
Warning
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
▷
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Speed control systems
Principle
The speed control systems provide assistance
while driving, for example, by limiting your
speed, maintaining your distance, or keeping
your vehicle in its lane.
These systems are operated using the buttons
on the steering wheel.
213
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Icon
Speed control system
Cruise control.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Distance control.
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-
tance with lane keeping.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Interrupting speed control systems
automatically
Store current speed.
Depending on the system, speed control
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-
stance in the following situations:
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
▷
When changing from selector lever position
D to P, N, or R.
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Turning on/selecting speed control
systems
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
"SPORT PLUS": Upon activating the in-
creased driving dynamics setting.
1.
To activate the speed control sys-
tem, press the on/off button on the left side
of the steering wheel.
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
Interrupting speed control systems
manually
Speed control systems can be stopped man-
ually.
2.
To select a different speed control
system while this system is active, repeat-
edly press the MODE button on the left of
the steering wheel until the desired system
is displayed on the toolbar on the instru-
ment cluster.
▷
Press the on/off button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The system is shown in white when the sys-
tem can be activated.
The system is shown in green when it can be
activated.
▷
Press the MODE button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The speed control system has been stopped.
The system is grayed out if the system has
failed or if the functional requirements are not
met.
214
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
The marking illuminates green when the
speed control system is active.
Continuing speed control systems
To resume the speed control system,
press the on/off button on the left side
of the steering wheel.
The mark illuminates gray when the system
is interrupted.
No mark is shown when the system is
turned off.
The speed control system will resume.
Switching off speed control systems
Speed control systems can be switched off
manually.
Notifications
Messages are displayed for some functions in
addition to the corresponding speed control
system indicator lights.
To turn off the speed control system,
press and hold the on/off button on the
left side of the steering wheel until the
indicators go out.
1. To configure the notification scope, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Notifications".
The speed control systems have been
switched off.
2. Select the desired setting.
Speed control systems switch off automatically
when drive-ready state is switched off.
Cruise Control
Adjusting speed values
The speeds for the speed control systems can
be adjusted on the steering wheel.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, the buttons on the left
of the steering wheel can be used to adjust
your set speed. The system maintains the set
speed. The system accelerates and brakes au-
tomatically as needed.
On the left side of the steering wheel,
repeatedly press the rocker button up
or down until the desired value is set.
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed
to the resistance point, the set speed in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Cruise Control information is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Each time the rocker button is pressed past
the resistance point, the set speed changes
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
General information
Cruise control can be activated starting from a
vehicle speed of 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise
Control settings can change under certain
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
Marking on speedometer
A marking for the speed set
for the speed control system is
shown on the speedometer.
215
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Warning
Set speed.
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.
Turning on the Cruise Control
Cruise Control can be switched on as follows:
With high traffic volume.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
For vehicles equipped with Distance Control:
Change the Cruise Control mode to Cruise
Control without Distance Control.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Warning
1.
To switch on Cruise Control, press
the on/off button on the left side of the
steering wheel.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
2.
To switch on Cruise Control, press
the MODE button on the left side of the
steering wheel repeatedly until Cruise Con-
trol is selected.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
216
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-
bility Control activates when cruise control is
switched on.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Additional information:
The maximum speed that can be set depends
on the vehicle.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Press rocker button to resistance point and
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing
the switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Additional information:
Speed control systems, refer to page 213.
Continuing cruise control
Adjusting the speed
At the stored speed
Store/maintain speed
The speed can be maintained and stored us-
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Press the rocker button on the left side
of the steering wheel up or down once
while the system is stopped.
When cruise control is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and saved as the desired
speed.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-
ter.
If the Speed Limit Assistant is off, you can also
save your current speed with the press of a
button.
To resume Cruise Control while the
system is stopped, press the on/off
button on the left side of the steering
wheel.
Press the SET button on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
Changing the speed
The speed can be changed with the buttons on
the steering wheel.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
On the left side of the steering wheel,
repeatedly press the rocker button up
or down until the desired speed is set.
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
desired speed in some situations, e.g., when
driving uphill or downhill.
At the current speed
To continue using the cruise control at
the current speed, press the rocker but-
ton up or down on the left side of the
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.
steering wheel.
Distance control
Speed Limit Assistant: at the
suggested speed
Principle
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to
the Cruise Control.
To apply the speed suggested by the
Speed Limit Assistant to the Cruise
Control, press the SET button on the
left of the steering wheel.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
Marking on speedometer
The marking on the speedometer indicates the
status of the Cruise Control.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
▷
The mark illuminates green
when the system is active.
▷
The mark illuminates gray
when the system is inter-
rupted.
Distance Control is operated using the buttons
on the left of the steering wheel. The distance
is set via iDrive.
▷
No mark is shown when the system is
turned off.
Distance Control information is displayed on
the instrument cluster.
Indicator light
General information
The Cruise Control status is also dis-
played with the indicator light on the in-
strument cluster. The indicator light il-
If the preceding vehicle brakes to a standstill
and drives off again shortly afterward, Dis-
tance Control is capable of detecting this as far
as given conditions allow.
luminates green when the system is activated.
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the button for the speed setting on the
steering wheel.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on vehicle equipment, some speed
control system information can also be dis-
played on the Head-up display.
System limits
Depending on the drive mode or drive power,
the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set
218
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate
Warning
Overview
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
Select the desired speed control
system.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Store current speed.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Sensors
Distance Control is controlled by the following
sensors:
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Additional information:
219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Application range
Distance Control is best when used on well-
maintained roads.
Interrupting Cruise Control with
Distance Control automatically
Cruise Control with Distance Control is inter-
rupted automatically in the following situations,
for example:
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
▷
When selector lever position D is disen-
gaged.
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control
when towing.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
"SPORT PLUS": When the setting for en-
hanced driving dynamics is enabled.
Turning on Cruise Control with
Distance Control
Switch on Cruise Control with Distance Control
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
When the driver’s seat belt and driver’s
door are opened.
If the system has not detected objects
for an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
1.
To switch on Cruise Control with
Distance Control, press the on/off button on
the left side of the steering wheel.
▷
▷
If the detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
2.
If necessary, press the MODE but-
ton on the left side of the steering wheel re-
peatedly until Distance Control is selected.
After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The selected distance to a vehicle driving
ahead is maintained.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Additional information:
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control activates when Distance Control is
switched on.
Speed control systems, refer to page 213.
Adjusting the speed
The speed can be set with the buttons on the
steering wheel.
Additional information:
220
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Continuing cruise control while
driving
Distance
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
is a risk of accidents and risk of property
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to
the traffic and weather conditions and main-
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly
by braking.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Additional information:
Adjusting the distance
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
1. To adjust the distance, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /
"Driving" / "Distance control" / "Distance".
Continuing cruise control while
vehicle is stationary
If the cruise control is stopped, the driver may
need to confirm their intention to drive off in
certain situations.
2. Select the desired setting.
Automatic adaptation of the distance
The displays show the following:
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Distance Control can be con-
figured to automatically adjust the distance to
the preceding vehicle within the set distance.
The system analyzes the traffic situation and
ambient conditions, e.g., poor visibility.
The mark on the speedometer
illuminates gray.
To have the distance adjusted automatically,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Distance control" /
"Situational distance control".
The indicator light illuminates green.
Cruise control can be continued as follows:
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷
Press the rocker button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
▷
Press the SET button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Indicator lights and warning lights
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Icon
Description
Safety information
Indicator light illuminates white:
No Distance Control because acceler-
ator pedal is being pressed.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes green:
Preceding vehicle has driven off.
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Indicator light flashes gray:
To switch between cruise control with/with-
out Distance Control, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /
"Distance control" / "Switch to Cruise Control".
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Distance
Control displays on the instrument cluster may
vary.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Assisted View
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, in Assisted View, Distance
Control information is displayed on the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Marking on speedometer
The marking on the speedometer indicates the
status of the Cruise Control.
▷
The mark illuminates green
when the system is active.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
▷
The mark illuminates gray
when the system is inter-
rupted.
Displays in the Head-up display
▷
No mark is shown when the system is
turned off.
Set speed
Depending on vehicle equipment, some speed
control system information can also be dis-
played on the Head-up display.
222
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
Distance information
The distance information icon appears
when the distance from the preceding
vehicle is too short.
Deceleration
Distance Control does not decelerate in the fol-
lowing situations:
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control is
switched off.
▷
▷
For cross traffic.
▷
The view on the Head-up display is se-
lected.
For oncoming traffic.
▷
▷
Distance to preceding vehicle is too short.
Merging vehicles
Vehicle speed is greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
Additional information:
Head-up display, refer to page 133.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Distance Control is subject to the system limits
of the sensors.
Distance Control may not be able automati-
cally restore your chosen distance if a preced-
ing vehicle suddenly cuts into your lane. It
may not be possible to restore the selected
distance in certain situations, including if you
are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle has been
detected ahead of you, the system requests
that the driver intervene by braking and mak-
ing an evasive maneuver, if needed.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Detection range
The vehicle sensors detect the traffic situation
in their detection range.
The sensor detection capability and automatic
braking power are limited.
223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.
Cornering
In front of bumps in the road.
With a heavy trailer.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
Under unfavorable weather or light conditions,
Distance Control may be limited in the follow-
ing ways:
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.
When Distance Control is on, if your set speed
is too high for a bend, your vehicle will be
slowed slightly in the bend. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Distance Control has a limited detection range.
Situations can arise in tight curves where a ve-
hicle driving ahead will not be detected or will
be detected very late.
Drive power
Depending on the drive mode or drive power,
the vehicle may exceed or drop below the set
desired speed in some situations, e.g., when
driving uphill or downhill.
Assisted Driving Mode
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance
Control with Steering Assistance and lane
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-
pose, the system executes supporting steering
movements, for instance when cornering.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Assisted Driving Mode is operated using the
buttons on the steering wheel.
Depending on vehicle speed, Assisted Driving
Mode orients itself using the lane markings or
preceding vehicles.
Driving off
Your vehicle cannot drive off automatically us-
ing Distance Control in the following situations,
for example:
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version, the Driver Attention
224
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the
driver's attention.
Button Function
Store current speed.
System information is indicated on the instru-
ment cluster displays and by the steering
wheel LEDs.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
If a lane boundary is crossed, the system is-
sues a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
The steering wheel vibration intensity can be
adjusted.
Set speed.
Sensors
Safety information
Assisted Driving Mode is controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on vehicle equipment, via the
front, side radar sensors.
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, via the
rear, side radar sensors.
▷
▷
The sensors in the steering wheel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version, the Driver Atten-
tion Camera in the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
Assisted Driving Mode:
Overview
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the
speed must be below 130 mph/210 km/h or
110 mph/180 km/h.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
▷
▷
▷
▷
The lane is sufficiently wide.
Hands are on the steering wheel rim.
The bend radius is sufficiently large.
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
The vehicle is driving in the center of the
lane.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
▷
▷
The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Distance Control is active.
225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
The seat belt on the driver's side is fas-
tened.
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode
automatically
Assisted Driving Mode automatically interrupts
steering support in the following situations, for
example:
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
The side-collision warning must be active,
depending on vehicle equipment.
▷
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, you must set on the control display
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,
respectively.
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment: at
speeds greater than 130 mph/210 km/h or
110 mph/180 km/h.
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.
With a strong steering intervention.
When leaving own lane.
Additional information:
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-
pending on the vehicle equipment, when
the driver turns the steering wheel while the
turn signal is switched on.
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode
1.
To switch Assisted Driving Mode on,
press the on/off button on the left side of
the steering wheel.
▷
▷
Lane is too narrow.
If a lane boundary is not detected and there
is no vehicle driving in front.
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is
interrupted.
2.
If necessary, press the MODE but-
ton on the left side of the steering wheel
until Assisted Driving Mode is selected on
the instrument cluster toolbar.
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
The indicator light illuminates gray
when the system is ready and not per-
forming any steering movement.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The status of Assisted Driving Mode is dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The indicator light illuminates gray
when the system is ready and not per-
forming any steering movement.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
The indicator light illuminates green
when the system is activated.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is ready.
When the system is switched on, the Forward
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-
tive.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is activated.
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
226
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driving Mode information is displayed on the
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Icon
Description
Warning light flashes yellow and
steering wheel vibrates:
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
A lane boundary has been crossed.
Warning light illuminates yellow and
acoustic signal sounds:
Displays on the steering wheel
System interruption is imminent.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
Warning light illuminates yellow:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Similar to the displays for Assisted Driving
Mode on the instrument cluster, the two LEDs
above the keypads on the steering wheel illu-
minate.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tic signal sounds:
1. To turn the steering wheel displays
on/off, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback
via steering wheel" / "Light elements".
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle
equipment and national-market ver-
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-
tem interruption is imminent.
2. Select the desired setting.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted
Driving Mode information can also be shown
on the Head-up display.
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
movements.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibration
intensity, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Feedback
via steering wheel" / "Vibration intensity".
Immediately grasp the steering wheel
with your hands and pay attention to
the surrounding traffic.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-
era detects that the driver is inattentive.
2. Select the desired setting.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, in Assisted View, Assisted
This setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Weather
System limits
With unfavorable weather or light conditions,
Assisted Driving Mode may be limited as fol-
lows:
General information
Assisted Driving Mode cannot be activated or
used meaningfully in certain situations, e.g.,
when towing a trailer.
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
boundaries.
▷
Short-term interruptions in case of already
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.
Safety information
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Lane Change Assistant
Principle
The Lane Change Assistant also performs
slight steering interventions to assist the driver
when changing lanes on multilane roads.
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
The Lane Change Assistant is switched on/off
via iDrive and operated with the turn signal
lever.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
The following system functions are shown on
the instrument cluster.
System limits of the sensors
Assisted Driving Mode is subject to the system
limits of the sensors.
General information
The Lane Change Assistant uses the Assisted
Driving Mode sensors.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Safety information
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.
Warning
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.
Protective covers on the steering wheel.
228
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Lane Change
Assistant" / "Lane Change Assistant".
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
2. Start the lane change.
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
▷
To change lanes with Lane Change As-
sistant, press the turn signal lever in the
desired direction to the resistance point.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the turn signal lever can also be pressed
beyond the resistance point.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
the Lane Change Assistant:
Supporting steering movement in the desired
direction can be felt a short time later.
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also
structurally separated from oncoming traf-
fic, e.g., guard rails.
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction or by op-
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
▷
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient
distance behind your own vehicle since be-
ginning the drive.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
Vehicle speed is max. approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
Steering wheel icon and lane change
arrow icon are green:
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.
The system performs a lane change
in the arrow direction.
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, you must set on the control display
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,
respectively.
Steering wheel icon is green and line
for lane marking on respective side is
gray:
Additional information:
The system detected the lane change
request. Lane change not currently
possible.
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, in Assisted View, Lane Change
Assistant information is displayed on the cen-
tral display area of the instrument cluster.
Turning the Lane Change Assistant
on/off
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system
apply.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Additional information:
Functional requirements
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
The following functional requirements apply for
lane changes when destination guidance is ac-
tive:
Lane change with active
guidance
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-
tivated.
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
Principle
A situation-dependent minimum speed has
been reached.
Lane change with active guidance assists the
driver when lane changes are necessary to
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed
on the instrument cluster. In addition, a slight
jerk can be felt on the steering wheel.
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap
in traffic in the adjacent lane.
A crossable lane boundary on the side of
the desired lane change is detected.
This function is switched on/off via iDrive.
Destination guidance is active on the navi-
gation system.
General information
When route guidance is active, the Lane
Change function uses the Assisted Driving
Mode sensors.
The function is not available when using
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Safety information
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, you must set on the control display
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,
respectively.
Additional information:
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Switching lane change on/off with
active destination guidance
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off
while guidance is on, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-
sisted Driving alerts also apply.
Additional information:
230
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
"Lane Guiding with Navigation" / "Lane
Guiding with Navigation".
Display in the instrument cluster
Icon
Function
Switching the steering wheel jerk
on/off
To enable/disable the steering wheel jerk for
Lane Change Assistant, go through the menu
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /
"Lane Guiding with Navigation" / "Steering
wheel impulse".
Indicates a necessary lane change.
The icon varies depending on the
traffic situation.
A green checkmark on the icon indi-
cates that the function is active.
A red cross on the icon indicates that
the system cannot assist with the
lane change.
Changing lanes
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the traffic situation is displayed
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-
igation destination, a corresponding notice is
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering
wheel.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the
instrument cluster.
System limits
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems, and
Driver Attention Camera apply to the lane
change function with active guidance.
1.
The system detects a suitable gap
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. An
icon with a green checkmark is displayed
on the instrument cluster. The system pre-
pares for the lane change.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level
with the opening.
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane
change suggestion.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into
the next lane.
Principle
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change
Assistant: Once the Check Control message
appears, the Lane Change Assistant can be
started by, e.g., operating the turn signal.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-
tance with guiding the vehicle in traffic jams on
select highways.
The system increases driving comfort in suita-
ble driving situations.
5. If necessary, the system automatically
starts additional lane changes.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is switched on/off
via iDrive.
Overview
System information is indicated on the instru-
ment cluster displays and by the steering
wheel LEDs.
Sensors
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is controlled by the
following sensors:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Safety information
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
The sensors in the steering wheel.
Driver Attention Camera.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-
able in the country in which the vehicle is
driven.
Warning
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
This system is only intended for use on
roads with structural separation from oncom-
ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the
system limits, the system can also remain ac-
tive on roads without structural separations
and may not react as expected. There is
a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on
roads without structural separations.
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the
LED displays on the steering wheel are
switched on.
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also
structurally separated from oncoming traf-
fic, e.g., guard rails.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.
The lane is sufficiently wide.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
The bend radius is sufficiently large.
The navigation system must clearly identify
the road and vehicle position.
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
▷
▷
This function must be available on the road
on which the vehicle is driving.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Do not allow antennas on the roof to be-
come covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.
232
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, you must set on the control display
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,
respectively.
Indicator light green: system is active.
Indicator light is white: System can be
used.
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Vehicle speed must be less than approx.
40 mph/60 km/h.
Displays on the steering wheel
Additional information:
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Switching Assisted Driving Mode
Plus on/off
To turn Assisted Driving Mode Plus on/off,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Assisted Driving
Plus" / "Assisted Driving Plus".
The two LEDs above the keypads on the
steering wheel illuminate depending on the sit-
uation.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active
and all functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode Plus have been met.
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate
green when Assisted Driving Mode Plus is
active.
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate
yellow when the system is interrupted.
To activate this function, remove your hands
from the steering wheel. Remain ready to steer
and brake at all times.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
▷
The LEDs on the steering wheel illuminate
red when the system is deactivated.
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
Grab the steering wheel immediately with
your hands.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is shown in green.
Additional information:
The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
When the system is switched on, the following
functions are enabled:
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted
Driving Mode Plus information can also be
shown on the Head-up display.
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.
Side collision mitigation.
233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-
tem and national-market version, the value
can be applied automatically.
System limits
The system limits of the following systems ap-
ply:
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.
Driver Attention Camera.
Sensors of the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Additional information:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 205.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Speed Limit Assistant
Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. You can have speeds suggested
by the Speed Limit Assistant adopted by your
vehicle's speed control systems.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Speed Limit Assist is switched on/off via iDrive
and operated using the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Suggested speeds can be adjusted by entering
tolerances.
The following system functions are shown on
the instrument cluster.
Overview
General information
Buttons on the steering wheel
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.
Distance Control.
Set speed, refer to page 213.
Assisted Driving Mode.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
234
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
Automatic adoption
on/off
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-
matically adopts any detected speed limits
when driving on roads with barriers separating
traffic in opposing directions.
1. To configure the settings for Speed Limit
Assist, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed
Limit Assistant".
It may not be possible to use this function
when driving with a trailer.
2. Select the desired setting:
After automatic adoption, the SET but-
ton on the left side of the steering
wheel can be pressed to switch back
to the last value set for desired speed.
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on
the equipment, detected speed limits
are applied automatically.
▷
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually to the active speed control system.
"Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
When the SET icon is displayed, press
the SET button on the left side of the
steering wheel.
▷
"Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort
functions will be turned off.
Speed adjustment
Additional information:
General information
Speed Limit Assist can be configured to adopt
the speed limit 1:1 or with a tolerance.
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 211.
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed on the instrument
cluster when Speed Limit Assist and a speed
control system are activated.
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
Icon
Function
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Setting the speed adjustment
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
1. To adjust the speed for Speed Limit As-
sist, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Speed
Limit Assistant".
Indicator light illuminates green: The
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
2. Select the desired setting:
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
"Adjust speed limits": Set a tolerance for
a speed adjustment. This tolerance ap-
plies to all speed limits.
▷
▷
Before a curve.
In front of an exit ramp on highways or
highway-like roads.
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to ": Activate or de-
activate additional speed adjustment.
This function is operated via iDrive.
"Adjust speed limits": First activate ad-
ditional speed adjustment, then set
a tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Note the system limits for Speed Limit Info.
Speed limits cannot be applied automatically
when using Cruise Control without Distance
Control.
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer hitch,
the speeds to be adopted are limited to the
trailer towing speed set on the control display.
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to
page 213.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 36.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply
when adapting vehicle speed to the route:
Adapting the speed to the
route
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-
tivated.
Principle
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
The cruise control can be configured to auto-
matically adjust the vehicle speed to the route
when Distance Control is active.
Guidance is activated in the navigation sys-
tem.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations as necessary:
The use of navigation software via Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-
tional limitations, for instance deviations
with navigation instructions.
▷
▷
Before making turns.
Before a roundabout.
236
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following
situations:
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer
hitch, you must set on the control display
that you are using a trailer or rear carrier,
respectively.
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
▷
On wintry roads.
Additional information:
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed
Limit Assist systems apply.
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Additional information:
Adapting speed automatically to
route
To activate/deactivate automatic speed ad-
justment, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Route speed
control" / "Adjust speed automatically".
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 215.
Distance Control, refer to page 218.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 224.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 234.
Adjusting the cornering speed
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-
ing on national-market version.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Route
speed control" / "Cornering speed".
2. Select the desired setting.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, in Assisted View, Route-Ahead
Assistant information is displayed on the cen-
tral display range of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 147.
System limits
Depending on national-market version or the
country in which the vehicle is currently being
driven, the Route-Ahead Assistant may not be
available.
237
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking
▷
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 243.
Trailer hitch view, refer to page 246.
Panorama view, rear, refer to page 247.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, additional
camera views can be used with parking view:
▷
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer
to page 244.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 244.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 245.
Parking assistance systems
3D view, refer to page 246.
Car wash view, refer to page 247.
Panorama view, front, refer to page 247.
Principle
With the Park Distance Control display and
various camera views, the parking assistance
systems help to park, maneuver, and reverse
the vehicle. Parking assistance systems are
operated using the Park Assist key or via the
Parking menu.
Activating panorama view using activation
points, refer to page 248.
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 249.
Remote 3D View, refer to page 250.
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be turned on
and off by selecting the corresponding icon.
Additional views with parking assistance lines
or obstacle markings can be shown.
When parking or reversing, the following indi-
vidual systems provide active support with as-
sistance functions and sensors:
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 250.
Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 253.
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 255.
Park Assist, refer to page 256.
Warning
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 262.
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 265.
Reversing Assistant, refer to page 266.
Trailer Assistant, refer to page 317.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Various camera views and camera perspec-
tives provide excellent visibility of the vehi-
cle surroundings while parking and maneuver-
ing. Depending on vehicle equipment, different
camera views are available.
The following camera views can be used with
the basic version:
238
Parking
CONTROLS
Overview
Display
Button in the vehicle
Turning display on/off
General information
The parking assistance systems view switches
off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
With reverse gear
When drive-ready state is on, the parking
assistance systems display is automatically
turned on when you engage selector lever po-
sition R.
The Park Assist key is located on the
center console.
With the Park Assist key
Sensors
To turn on the parking assistance sys-
tem display, press the Park Assist key
on the center console.
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Via iDrive
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
Front camera.
To turn on the parking assistance systems dis-
play, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Parking".
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
Display in the instrument cluster
Additional information:
The instrument cluster shows displays for
some parking assistance systems such as
Park Distance Control or Automatic Parking
Assistant.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Calling up Park menu
Some parking assistance systems can be set
individually in the Park menu.
1. To bring up the Parking menu, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Parking".
2. Select the desired settings.
1
Status of parking assistance systems
Assisted View
2
3
Selection menu
239
Parking
CONTROLS
Camera image
Display on the control display
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
General information
The parking assistance system view on the
control display varies depending on vehicle
equipment and the parking assistance system
activated.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on the national-market version, ei-
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-
era perspective is displayed.
Assistance view
Toolbar, left
Different views and settings can be selected
using the left toolbar, depending on vehicle
equipment.
▷
▷
"Parking View"
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera
views or the Park Distance Control view are
displayed.
1
Toolbar, left
"Assist view"
2
3
4
Camera image
Vehicle top view
Toolbar, right
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-
played.
▷
▷
"Panorama view"
The cross traffic view is displayed.
"More"
Parking view
▷
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle
is displayed.
"Trailer coupling view"
The view shows the zoom onto the
trailer hitch.
"Car wash view"
Your own lane can be displayed to make
it easier to drive into a car wash.
1
Toolbar, left
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image
"Camera cleaning"
Selection window
Automatic camera perspective
Semi-automatic camera perspective
Side view
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-
view camera can be switched on as
needed.
▷
"Settings"
Settings can be entered in the Park
menu.
Toolbar, right
240
Parking
CONTROLS
Toolbar, right
Icon
Meaning
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed
in the right toolbar.
White: an available maneuver is se-
lected but is not being performed.
Functional requirements have not
been met or the function transfer is
complete.
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.
Available parking methods of the Automatic
Parking Assistant.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.
Trailer Assistant functions.
Green: A parking assistance system
is on. Functions are controlled de-
pending on the system activated.
The Maneuver Assistant records
the maneuver to be saved.
Additional information in case of malfunc-
tions.
Status of parking assistance
systems
Additional displays
General information
The status of parking assistance systems is
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of
the control display, in the status area on the in-
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition
to this icon, text also appears on the control
display.
Additional views can be shown in the camera
image for the parking assistance systems dis-
play, e.g., parking aid lines. This makes park-
ing and maneuvering easier.
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
The following parking assistance systems are
displayed:
Turning additional displays on/off
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.
Maneuver Assistant.
Back-up Assistant.
1. To turn additional displays in the camera
view on/off, go through the menu as fol-
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Parking".
Trailer Assistant.
2. Select the desired setting.
Icon
Meaning
No search for parking assistance
system offers.
No other parking assistance sys-
tems available.
Parking assistance systems have
failed.
Searching for parking assistance
system offers is active.
241
Parking
CONTROLS
Using parking aid lines
Parking aid lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads into the boundaries of the
parking space.
Pathway lines
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green
pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
The pathway lines help to estimate the re-
quired space when parking and maneuvering
on level roads.
Depending on the engaged gear position, the
pathway lines are displayed in front of or be-
hind the vehicle in the camera image on the
control display.
The sensors detect obstacles when parking.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are shown and marked in the camera
image on the control display.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Turning circle lines
Functional limitations
The parking assistance systems can only be
used to a limited extent in the following situa-
tions:
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.
With open cargo area.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
The turning circle lines show the path with the
smallest possible turning circle on level roads
in the camera image on the control display.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown such as an open door.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
242
Parking
CONTROLS
System limits
Rearview camera
Safety information
Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind
the vehicle is shown in the camera view on
the control display. The rearview camera is
switched on when reversing and can be oper-
ated via iDrive or the Park Assist key.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Additional displays can be shown on the cam-
era view, e.g., parking assistance lines and ob-
stacle markings.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
System limits of the sensors
Parking assistance systems may be restricted
by the system limits of the sensors.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the rearview camera:
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
▷
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.
Field of view
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
The camera area is clean and clear.
Turning the rearview camera on/off
Detection of objects
The sensors may not detect very low obstacles
as well as high, protruding objects, e.g., wall
ledges.
Turning the camera view on
automatically
The rearview camera is automatically turned
on if selector lever position R is engaged while
drive-ready state is on.
Objects shown on the control display may be
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the
distance to the objects on the control display.
Turning the camera view off
automatically
The rearview camera turns off automatically
when driving forward or when a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
The camera's detection range can be limited
by protruding cargo, a rear carrier, or a trailer.
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
The malfunctioning camera's detection range
is shown by the shaded area on the control
display.
243
Parking
CONTROLS
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Turning the semi-automatic camera
perspective on/off
1.
To manually switch on the rearview
camera press the Park Assist button on the
center console.
1.
To switch on the semi-automatic
camera perspective, press the Park Assist
key on the center console.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
2.
Select the semi-automatic camera per-
spective icon in the selection window.
The rearview camera view is switched on.
To exit the fixed camera view, select another
camera view in the selection window.
Depending on vehicle equipment: The
icon for automatic camera perspective is
automatically selected in the selection win-
dow.
Automatic camera
perspective
To exit rearview camera view, select another
camera view in the selection window or press
the Park Assist key again.
Principle
Deactivated rearview camera
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction. This perspective adapts to the
respective driving situation.
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
instance when the cargo area is open, the
camera image is displayed with gray shading.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side
Park Distance Control as necessary.
Semi-automatic camera
perspective
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
Principle
Depending on the parking direction and en-
gaged selector lever position, the semi-auto-
matic camera perspective shows a fixed cam-
era perspective with the areas in front of or
behind the vehicle.
You can turn the camera perspective on or off
using the control display.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
You can turn the camera perspective on or off
using the control display.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
244
Parking
CONTROLS
Turning the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Lateral Parking Aid display
Turning the camera view on/off
automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
The icon for automatic camera perspective
is automatically selected in the selection win-
dow.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window.
Colored obstacle markings warn the driver
when obstacles have been detected.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a semi-automatic camera
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the
automatic camera perspective when reverse
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-
spective will then be maintained for the current
parking operation.
If no obstacle markings are displayed, no ob-
stacles have been detected.
Limits of the side protection
The Lateral Parking Aid only displays station-
ary obstacles that were previously detected by
the sensors while passing them.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
1.
To switch on automatic camera per-
spective, press the Park Assist button on
the center console.
Side view
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
2.
The icon for automatic camera perspec-
tive is automatically selected in the selec-
tion window.
Principle
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window or press the Park Assist key again.
The camera view looks from the rear to the
front and, if there is a hazard, focuses auto-
matically on potential obstacles.
Side view can be turned on or off using the
control display.
245
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /
"3D view".
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
Turning the side view on/off
The selection window lets you choose the side
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.
Trailer hitch view
1.
To switch on side view, press the
Park Assist key on the center console.
Principle
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
2.
Select the camera icon for the desired
vehicle side in the selection window.
Trailer hitch view can be turned on or off using
the control display.
To exit the side view, select another camera
view in the selection window.
General information
When zooming in, remember that the view
may no longer show certain obstacles.
3D view
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Principle
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the
vehicle top view in the selection window.
Turning the trailer hitch view on/off
Fixed perspectives can be selected directly on
the circular path in the selection window, or by
swiping the vehicle in the middle of the camera
image.
1.
To switch on trailer hitch view, press
the Park Assist key on the center console.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon on the circular path.
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /
"Trailer coupling view".
3D view can be turned on or off using the con-
trol display.
To exit the trailer hitch view, select another
camera view in the left toolbar.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the 3D view on/off
1.
To switch on 3D view, press the
Park Assist key on the center console.
246
Parking
CONTROLS
To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
Display
Display
Two static circle segments are displayed in the
camera image. These circle segments help to
estimate the distance of the trailer to the trailer
hitch.
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
A docking line dependent on the steering-
wheel angle helps with aiming for the trailer
with the trailer hitch.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
Car wash view
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 123.
Principle
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash.
Panorama View
This function can be turned on or off on the
control display.
Principle
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
intersections.
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-
era cover the side of the vehicle.
Turning the car wash view on/off
1.
To switch on the car wash view,
press the Park Assist key on the center
console.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function
can be used when reversing or driving forward.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
Panorama view can be turned on or off using
the control display.
2. Go through the menu as follows: "More" /
"Car wash view".
247
Parking
CONTROLS
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function
can be activated automatically by saving acti-
vation points.
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-
played when forward gear is engaged.
General information
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Automatic activation of
panorama view
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Principle
Positions at which panorama view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
Sensors
Panorama view is controlled by the following
sensors:
Up to ten activation points can be saved and
edited.
▷
▷
Rearview camera.
Depending on if vehicle is equipped with
front camera.
The activation points can be used when driv-
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-
ket version, when reversing.
Turning the panoramic view on/off
General information
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
systems chapter.
1.
To turn on panorama view, press
the Park Assist key on the center console.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
automatic activation of panorama view:
2. Bring up the following menu via iDrive:
"Panorama view".
▷
▷
A GPS signal must be received.
To exit panorama view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
Depending on national-market version: You
must activate a BMW ID or driver profile.
Display
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera
must be installed.
The direction of travel, the selector lever
position, and the vehicle angle must match
a stored activation point.
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
248
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
To edit an activation point, press and
hold the desired activation point.
Storing activation points
Desired activation points can be saved.
To delete an activation point, swipe over
the desired activation point.
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you
want panorama view to switch on automat-
ically, then stop.
Door opening angle
2.
Press the Park Assist key on the
center console.
Principle
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary.
3. Go through the menu as follows:
"Panorama view" / "Activation point" /
"Save activation point".
This display helps estimate how far the doors
can be opened when parking.
Activation points are saved with the following
information, for example:
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.
With the city/town and the street.
A default name.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
You can rename the location and street infor-
mation created automatically.
Display
Using activation points
To enable/disable the use of activation points,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Parking" / "GPS-based".
Editing activation points
Activation points can be renamed or deleted,
individually or collectively.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
1.
Press the Park Assist key on the
center console.
System limits
The door opening angle view does not warn
you of approaching road users.
Parking assistance systems displays are
shown on the control display.
2. Go through the menu as follows:
"Panorama view" / "Manage points".
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
A list of all saved activation points is dis-
played.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
249
Parking
CONTROLS
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
other objects.
▷
▷
Data protection, refer to page 66.
BMW ID, refer to page 67.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
Remote 3D View can be activated or deacti-
vated individually or together with other func-
tions.
Remote 3D View
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Data privacy".
Principle
The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
roundings on a mobile device.
2. Select the desired setting.
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Remote 3D View shows a snapshot of the sit-
uation.
System limits
Remote 3D View may not be fully operational
or may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
General information
For reasons of data protection, Remote
3D View can only be used three times within
two hours.
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
Sensors
Remote 3D View is controlled by the following
sensors:
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
Park Distance Control
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
Remote 3D View:
Principle
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
▷
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
▷
In ConnectedDrive countries, you must acti-
vate a BMW ID with an existing Connected-
Drive account.
The range of Park Distance Control, depending
on obstacles and environmental conditions, is
approx. 6 ft/2 m.
Additional information:
250
Parking
CONTROLS
Park Distance Control turns on and off auto-
matically in certain situations: You can enable
or disable automatic activation on the control
display.
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Park Distance Control switches on automati-
cally in the following situations:
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on
when selector lever position R is engaged.
▷
While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
Safety information
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
To activate/deactivate automatic activation
when obstacles are detected, go through the
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /
"Parking" / "Automatic PDC activation".
Turning off the system automatically
Park Distance Control switches off automati-
cally when driving forward or if a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
Turning the system on/off manually
Warning
To manually switch on Park Distance
Control, press the Park Assist button
on the center console.
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
When the LED illuminates, the system is on.
When the LED goes out, the system is off.
If the system is manually switched on when
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
Sensors
Park Distance Control is controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Acoustic warning
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
General information
An intermittent tone is given as acoustic warn-
ing for Park Distance Control to signal an ap-
proaching object. E.g., when an object is de-
251
Parking
CONTROLS
tected at the rear left of the vehicle, a sound is
heard from the rear left speaker.
When the Park Distance Control is switched
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically
switched on again.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
Visual warning
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display and instrument cluster as soon
as Park Distance Control is activated.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
for a better estimation of the space required.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
and rear speakers.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings
indicate when obstacles are detected within
the detection range.
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Cross Traf-
fic Warning, a warning is also shown on the
display for vehicles approaching from the side
at the rear and front.
Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Adjusting the volume
Display
1. To adjust the volume of the acoustic warn-
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "PDC
signal volume".
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-
hind the vehicle.
2. Set the desired value.
Depending on national-market
version: Turn off acoustic warning
Depending on national-market version, the
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-
forming a parking maneuver.
Press the acoustic warning icon in the sta-
tus field at the top of the control display.
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-
cle.
252
Parking
CONTROLS
Depending on the national-market version, the
rear functions of Park Distance Control remain
switched on when trailer towing is enabled.
The trailer towing icon is shown on the
control display.
Additional information:
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to
page 315.
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-
cle.
Unwarranted warnings
Unwarranted warnings may be given if the
system limits of Park Distance Control are
reached.
The gray shaded areas indicate the sensor
detection range. No obstacles have been de-
tected within detection range.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Colored markings in the shaded area indicate
that obstacles have been detected within the
detection range.
If the shaded area is not continuous, the area
next to the vehicle has not been scanned yet.
Malfunction
If Park Distance Control malfunctions,
the Attention icon appears on the con-
trol display.
System limits
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor
detection range may not be shown on the con-
trol display.
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by the sensors when passing
by.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control has failed. Have the ve-
hicle checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Park Distance Control does not detect when
an obstacle moves later. When the vehicle is
stationary, the gray shaded areas on the sides
are hidden after a certain time. The area on
the side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Active Park Distance Control
Principle
Trailer towing
Active Park Distance Control is the brake func-
tion of Park Distance Control and initiates
emergency braking in the event of an acute
risk of collision.
The rear functions of Park Distance Control are
turned off when towing a trailer or when the
trailer socket is occupied.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor
detection range is shown by the shaded area
on the control display.
The system can be used below walking speed
when reversing or coasting backward.
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.
253
Parking
CONTROLS
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in rear bumpers.
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
Rearview camera.
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
Driving off after emergency braking
Active Park Distance Control can be tempora-
rily deactivated on the control display, where
you can also change the settings for this sys-
tem.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
Safety information
Deactivating Active Park Distance
Control temporarily
After emergency braking, Active Park Distance
Control can be temporarily deactivated on the
control display. A corresponding message is
displayed.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Go through the menu as follows: "Configure" /
"Deactivate temporarily".
No further emergency braking will be per-
formed in this situation as you continue driving.
The function is automatically reactivated when
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
Settings
You can configure which areas of your vehicle
to protect with the Park Distance Control sys-
tem.
Warning
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance
system cannot react correctly because the
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not
use the driver assistance system while tow-
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Active
PDC emergency braking".
2. Select the desired setting.
Display
Sensors
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
Active Park Distance Control is controlled by
the following sensors:
254
Parking
CONTROLS
System limits
Safety information
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional limitations
Active Park Distance Control cannot be used in
the following situations, for example:
▷
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the
vehicle speed, emergency braking is deacti-
vated.
▷
When driving with a trailer.
If applicable, turn off the system temporarily, if
needed.
Warning
Additional information:
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance
system cannot react correctly because the
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not
use the driver assistance system while tow-
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.
Hill Descent Control, refer to page 209.
Drive-off monitoring
Principle
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-
itoring reduces the drive power when driving
off.
Sensors
Drive-off monitoring is controlled by the follow-
ing sensors:
When obstacles are detected in close range in
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual
braking.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-
cle, the system will brake.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
drive-off monitoring:
Drive-Off Monitoring can be activated/deacti-
vated on the control display.
You can cancel reduced acceleration, e.g., by
pressing the accelerator twice.
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged
when the vehicle is stationary.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.
255
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,
nearly to the end point.
Functional limitation
Drive-off monitoring is deactivated when the
trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-
ing is activated, e.g., when using a trailer or
rear bicycle rack.
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-
tion and obstacle detection.
Activating/deactivating Drive-Off
Monitoring
Automatic Parking Assistant
To activate/deactivate Drive-Off Monitoring,
go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Drive off
monitoring".
Principle
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support
when parallel parking and parking transverse
to the road.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
In addition, the system makes it easier to
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking
spaces.
Depending on national-market version, this
system turns on automatically for the next
drive.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
Canceling reduced drive power
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in
the following situations:
The system calculates the best possible park-
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.
After the accelerator pedal has been de-
pressed completely twice.
The operating principle and operation of Park
Assist is divided into the following steps:
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.
Turning on.
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by
covering a certain distance, the drive power is
released gradually.
Parking.
Driving out of parking spaces.
Display
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-
formed automatically.
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
movements.
System limits
When driving out of perpendicular parking
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the
parking space to enable continued driving in
the desired direction.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
256
Parking
CONTROLS
A parking maneuver can be interrupted and
continued manually.
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Settings can be customized as desired, e.g., to
adjust how parking maneuvers are displayed
or to set a sound for suitable parking spaces.
Warning
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
increases the comfort and range of uses of
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are
marked with lines is possible. The parking ma-
neuver can also be performed using Remote
Control Parking on a smartphone.
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance
system cannot react correctly because the
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not
use the driver assistance system while tow-
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking methods
Park Assist supports the following functions:
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
When parallel parking: Parking in reverse, par-
allel to the road.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
257
Parking
CONTROLS
When perpendicular parking: Parking forward
or in reverse, perpendicular to the road.
With Park Assist Professional: Parking in car
parks with parking lines.
Sensors
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
is additionally controlled by the following cam-
eras:
When driving out of parallel parking spaces.
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
Measurement of parking spaces
The following functional requirements apply
when measuring parking spaces:
When driving out of perpendicular parking
spaces.
▷
Driving forward: up to approx.
22 mph/35 km/h.
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
The following functional requirements apply for
suitable parking spaces:
Longitudinal parking:
258
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-
ches/15 cm.
Minimum length of gap between two
objects: vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
Displays
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
General information
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
The current status of parking assistance sys-
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up
display, depending on vehicle equipment.
Minimum width of gap: vehicle width plus
approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
The minimum depth corresponds to your
vehicle's length.
Different icons are shown on the control dis-
play for selecting the parking method.
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-
sponds to the prioritized parking option.
The direction of the arrow changes for the
icons for parking methods for driving out of a
parking space.
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:
Icon
Meaning
▷
The parking space must be clearly marked
with lines.
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.
Reverse perpendicular parking.
Forward perpendicular parking.
▷
The one-time calibration of the camera af-
ter vehicle delivery must be complete. Drive
a few kilometers in daylight to do so.
Parking operation
The following functional requirements apply
when pulling into a parking space:
Turning parking operation display
on/off
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the
camera image on the control display.
▷
▷
The doors and cargo area are closed.
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
Leaving parking spaces
The following functional requirements apply
when pulling out of a parking space:
To turn the parking maneuver display on/
off, go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver
Assistance" / "Parking" / "Show assistance
information".
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
Turning the signal tone on/off
To turn the signal tone for suitable parking
spaces on/off, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
259
Parking
CONTROLS
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Sound when
available".
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
When parking with Park Assist, you must se-
lect a parking method depending on the avail-
able parking spaces.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1. Switch on drive-ready state to pull out of
the parking space using Park Assist.
1. For the parking space search when driving
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.
2.
When your vehicle is stationary,
press the Park Assist key on the center
console or engage reverse gear.
The parking space search is activated
and displayed on the instrument cluster.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
2.
Press the Park Assist key on the
center console or engage reverse gear.
3. On the control display: Select the desired
parking method.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
On the instrument cluster, select the sug-
gested parking method using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display and in the instrument
cluster.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
3. On the control display: Select one of the
parking methods offered. You can switch to
another parking maneuver as necessary.
The status symbol for the Automatic
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The
system takes control of the maneuver.
On the instrument cluster, select the sug-
gested parking method using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
The status symbol for the Automatic
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The
system takes control of the parking opera-
tion.
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for
Park Distance Control.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
260
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
When the system is automatically aborted, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled
without engaging selector lever position P.
Driving can continue immediately.
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
Park Assist is canceled automatically in situa-
tions such as the following:
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
With open cargo area.
▷
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.
With open hood.
For diagonal parking spaces.
When towing a trailer.
With the doors open.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking
spaces that are only marked with lines on
the ground. The system orients itself ac-
cording to objects.
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered
parking spaces with automatic locking
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-
tems.
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome such as curbs.
Functional limitations
Park Assist may be restricted in the following
situations:
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
▷
▷
On slippery ground.
When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
261
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Maneuver Assistant
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Principle
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.
Parking and maneuvering operations can be
recorded and then carried out automatically by
the system.
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and
thereby recorded.
When the vehicle reaches the activation area
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-
trol display or in the instrument cluster.
Warning
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance
system cannot react correctly because the
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not
use the driver assistance system while tow-
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.
After the activation, the system takes control
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver
automatically.
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-
formed using Remote Control Parking on a
smartphone.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
262
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Warning
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
Functional requirement
To use the Maneuver Assistant, the one-off
calibration process of the camera after vehicle
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilome-
ters in daylight to do so.
Detection range
Recording maneuver
General information
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-
ent locations.
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-
corded.
Identical maneuvers under different ambient
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-
tions.
The detection range for a maneuver is divided
into the following areas:
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will
begin with the localization in the back-
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m
around the distance covered of a stored
maneuver.
In total, a distance covered of approx.
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible
maneuvers can be recorded.
▷
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the
control display.
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.
Recording maneuver
1. To record a maneuver, drive the vehicle to
the desired starting point and stop.
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored
maneuver on the control display can be ac-
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.
After the activation, the system takes con-
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-
neuver automatically.
2.
Press the Park Assist key on the
center console.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
Sensors
3. Select the following function via iDrive:
"Record new path".
The Maneuver Assistant is controlled by the
following sensors:
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-
tion.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.
263
Parking
CONTROLS
"Recording active": The maneuver is re-
corded.
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
When recording a route, do not drive faster
than 9 mph/15 km/h.
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
While recording, the distance covered will
be displayed.
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
When the maximum distance covered or
the maximum speed is reached, a message
will be displayed and a signal tone will
sound.
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can
continue immediately.
5. When the vehicle is stationary, select the
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
automatically
following function via iDrive:
recording".
"Save
The maneuver can be saved with an auto-
matically generated name, or renamed or
discarded.
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
6. Select the desired action.
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
Performing stored maneuver
1. To perform the stored maneuver, drive the
vehicle into the activation area and stop.
The control display and instrument cluster
indicate that a stored maneuver can be ac-
tivated.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
With open cargo area.
With open hood.
With the doors open.
2.
Press the icon to select the stored ma-
neuver.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
The status symbol for the Maneuver
Assistant illuminates green. After the acti-
vation, the system takes control of the vehi-
cle and carries out the maneuver automat-
ically. If applicable, follow the instructions
on the control display or in the instrument
cluster.
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic
sensors and cameras are reached.
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
In case of obstacles.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
On snow-covered or slippery road.
When the lane is too narrow.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
With trailer towing.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
manually
The vehicle can be controlled manually during
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-
tions:
In the event of an automatic cancellation of
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a
complete stop and selector lever position P is
engaged.
264
Parking
CONTROLS
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
If the calibration process for the cam-
era is not completed after vehicle deliv-
ery, an icon appears on the display of
the parking assistance systems when reverse
gear is engaged.
Editing stored maneuvers
Maneuvers can be deleted or renamed via
iDrive, individually or collectively.
Tap the icon and follow the instructions on the
control display.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Recorded
paths".
Remote Control Parking
Principle
2. Select the maneuver to be edited.
3. Select the desired action.
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park
Assist Professional.
System limits
The maneuver is performed independently,
without you having to be inside the vehicle, us-
ing a smartphone and the My BMW App. This
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,
the vehicle's parking position can be corrected
by maneuvering manually with the My BMW
App.
Functional limitations
The Maneuver Assistant does not provide sup-
port when towing a trailer.
A maneuver that has already been started can
be continued at any time with Remote Control
Parking.
System limits can cause functional limitations
such as in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
Vehicle features and options
In case of recorded maneuvers where the
system minimum distance to objects can-
not be maintained.
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the distance covered, for in-
stance other tires or changed ambient con-
ditions like light conditions or weather.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-
neuvers when driving into the activation
area.
In multi-story parking garages, for record-
ings at different parking levels, or for re-
cordings that run over several parking lev-
els.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
265
Parking
CONTROLS
General information
Note the information in the Automatic Parking
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.
Parking with Remote Control
Parking
1. To perform the parking maneuver with Re-
mote Control Parking, engage selector lever
position P.
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized
use.
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and
cargo area.
The low-beam headlights are switched on for
the duration of the maneuver.
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-
ward, or select the desired parking method.
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist
Professional is only available for Remote Con-
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the
vehicle.
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are
present.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
Remote Control Parking:
Depending on the option selected in the My
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at
the end of the parking maneuver or you can
take control of the vehicle again.
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.
The doors and cargo area are closed.
Make sure that no one is located within
range of the maneuver.
System limits
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-
tooth connection transmission due to external
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-
rupted.
▷
Make sure that no one is located in the nar-
row spaces between the vehicle and sta-
tionary objects, e.g., between the vehicle
and a garage wall.
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not
be available. Follow the instructions in the My
BMW App.
▷
To manually correct the vehicle position on
the My BMW App, the minimum width of
the parking space must be the vehicle width
plus 1.9 ft/0.6 m.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with Re-
mote Control Parking.
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking
space. This function is offered on the My BMW
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-
tions.
The My BMW App must be installed on a
compatible smartphone.
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-
nectedDrive account.
Back-up assistant
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-
phone.
Principle
The distance between vehicle and smart-
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-
ing or road situations.
A valid digital key must be set up for the
vehicle, then recognized without issue.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
266
Parking
CONTROLS
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-
ing.
Warning
The Reversing Assistant takes control of steer-
ing. The driver must control the speed using
the accelerator and brake pedals.
When using the trailer hitch, the assistance
system cannot react correctly because the
sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-
cident, injury, and property damage. Do not
use the driver assistance system while tow-
ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,
e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.
With Back-up Assistant: a maximum distance
of 164 ft/50 m is saved.
With Back-up Assistant Professional: a maxi-
mum distance of 656 ft/200 m is saved.
Vehicle features and options
Warning
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the Reversing Assistant:
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
▷
No trailer towing.
Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently
bright light conditions on the saved route.
Safety information
▷
▷
Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.
Reversing Assistant Professional: The one-
off calibration of the camera after vehicle
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilo-
meters in daylight to do so.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
267
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Bring up the following menu via iDrive:
"Cancel".
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1. To reverse with automatic steering, switch
on drive-ready state.
Press the Park Assist key on the
center console.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The Reversing Assistant is canceled automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
2.
When your vehicle is stationary,
press the Park Assist key on the center
console or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
3. Bring up the following menu via iDrive:
"Start back-up Assistant".
When shifting from reverse gear to another
selector lever position.
The length of the distance covered is dis-
played on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
If applicable, follow the instructions on the
control display or in the instrument cluster.
When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
▷
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
The status symbol for the Back-up As-
sistant illuminates green. The system takes
over the steering.
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a
slope.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.
When the trailer power socket is occupied
or when trailer towing is activated.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
▷
▷
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164
ft/50 m.
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle
such as by shifting to forward gear.
System limits
Speed threshold
The maximum speed when reversing is limited
to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the func-
tion is interrupted.
268
Parking
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the route, for instance other
tires or changed ambient conditions like
weather.
▷
Light conditions changed for Back-up As-
sistant Professional.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
269
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain
and chassis" / "IconicSounds".
Vehicle features and options
2. Select the desired setting.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Adaptive suspension
The adaptive suspension is a variable, me-
chanically controlled sport suspension that re-
duces movement of the vehicle body while
driving with a sporty style or on uneven roads.
Driving dynamics and driving comfort are in-
creased through the adjustment of the chassis.
Adaptive M chassis
The Adaptive M suspension is a variable, me-
chanically controlled sports suspension that
reduces movement of the vehicle body while
driving with a sporty style or on uneven roads,
and is thus designed to be sporty.
Driving dynamics and driving comfort are in-
creased through the adjustment of the chassis.
BMW IconicSounds
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1. To configure BMW IconicSounds, go
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
270
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
Icon
Function
Vehicle features and options
Air recirculation mode.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Additional information:
Fresh air.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Climate control
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Overview
Functions in the Climate menu
Some climate control functions, e.g., seat heat-
ing or air flow, can be configured using the
Climate Comfort menu on the control display.
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
Icon
Function
Turn the climate control sys-
tem on/off.
Buttons, automatic climate control
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
The defrost function and rear window heat-
ing can be turned on/off using the instrument
panel.
271
Climate control
CONTROLS
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
The climate control system can be turned on or
off via iDrive.
Icon
Function
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Rear automatic climate control
2.
Tap the power button.
Icon
Function
The entire climate control system is turned on
or off with the last settings applied.
Automatic program.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Temperature.
Air distribution.
Seat heating.
Settings
You can configure individual settings for cli-
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:
▷
▷
Seat heating intensity.
Pre-ventilation.
1.
To configure the climate control
functions individually, select the icon for the
Climate Control menu on the menu bar.
Calling up climate control functions
Access the Climate menu via iDrive:
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2.
Tap the settings button.
Or:
3. Select the desired setting.
Go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "Climate control".
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
To display the menu bar with temperature set-
tings in full screen mode, for example, when
using third-party apps, swipe up from the
lower edge of the control display.
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.
272
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Via iDrive
Seat heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
General information
2.
Tap the settings button.
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
cupants.
3. "Rear climate control"
4. Select the desired setting.
The rear automatic climate control can be ac-
tivated with standard setting for temperature
and AUTO program:
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
window condensation to the extent possible.
"Reset settings at the end of the trip"
Locking the rear automatic climate
control
Overview
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Rear climate control"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
1
Air flow intensity
Climate control functions bar
Settings
2
3
4
5
Automatic program
Temperature
Principle
Seat heating
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the
desired temperature and individual settings.
Steering wheel heating
Active seat ventilation
The AUTO program cools, ventilates, and
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
program provides the best possible settings
for climate control functions depending on
the outside temperature, interior temperature,
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
perature setting:
▷
▷
Air flow.
Air distribution.
273
Climate control
CONTROLS
4. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
5. Select the desired setting.
Turning the automatic program
on/off
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
The AUTO program can be switched on or off
via iDrive.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Custom settings for climate control functions
are saved and applied automatically, e.g., after
the vehicle is started.
2.
Tap the automatic program button.
Switching the rear climate control
automatic program on/off
Temperature
Via iDrive
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Setting the temperature
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Rear climate control"
4. "Automatic climate"
Select the desired setting.
Via rear climate control display
Tap the button.
You can set the desired temperature for driver
and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
Setting the intensity
When the automatic program is activated,
the intensity of individual climate control func-
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-
ally.
▷
▷
Increase the temperature.
Reduce the temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Individual settings"
274
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
Via iDrive
Air distribution settings
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Principle
In manual mode, the air distribution can be
adjusted as needed.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Rear climate control"
Adjusting the air distribution
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:
4. Set the desired temperature.
Via rear climate control display
Set the desired temperature:
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.
Lower the temperature.
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-
row 1.
Air flow
Aim the air flow toward the upper body
area, arrow 2.
Aim the air flow at the windshield, ar-
row 3.
Principle
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
Adjusting the air flow
The air flow can be set via iDrive.
1.
Tap the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Adjusting the air distribution of the
rear climate control
2.
Select the desired setting.
Automatic program:
Tap the icon on the rear climate control
display to set the desired air distribu-
tion.
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the
air flow.
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air
flow.
Manual mode:
275
Climate control
CONTROLS
Functional requirement
Maximum cooling can be used when the out-
side temperature exceeds approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃
and when drive-ready state is on.
Air conditioning
Principle
With the climate control function, the air inside
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then
warmed again depending on the temperature
settings.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via
iDrive:
Functional requirement
The climate control function can be used with
standby or drive-ready state.
1. Select the Climate menu icon on the menu
bar.
2.
Tap the maximum cooling button.
Switching the cooling function on/off
The air conditioning can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. Open the vents.
Air recirculation mode
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Principle
With air recirculation, if unpleasant odors or
pollutants are detected in the outside air, the
outside air supply can be temporarily stopped.
The system then recirculates the interior air.
2.
Tap the climate control function but-
ton.
In recirculated-air mode, the air conditioning
is automatically turned on to dry the air and
avoid window condensation.
With automatic air recirculation, outside air is
fed in, or the interior air is recirculated, de-
pending on the outside air quality.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
When air recirculation is off, outside air is chan-
neled into the interior.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Maximum cooling
General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
Principle
Maximum cooling is used to cool the vehicle
interior quickly and effectively.
The lowest temperature and the maximum air
flow are set automatically.
276
Climate control
CONTROLS
Turning air recirculation on/off
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or
off via iDrive:
General information
The following settings can be applied:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Automatic program.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2. The current operating mode is displayed on
the climate control functions bar. Tap the
button until the desired operating mode is
set.
Turning the SYNC program on/off
The SYNC program can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.
Fresh air.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2.
Tap the SYNC program button.
Automatic air recirculation.
If the settings for the front passenger's side or
rear are changed, the SYNC program turns off
automatically.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-
culation turns off automatically after some time
based on the ambient conditions in order to
prevent condensation.
Defrost function
SYNC program
Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windshield and
the front side windows.
Principle
If the SYNC program is activated, the settings
for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-
senger's side and to the rear.
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
densation.
For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-
gram is deactivated, the following settings are
adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-
gram depending on seat occupancy:
The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and front side windows.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor.
▷
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
the settings for the driver's side are applied
to the front passenger side.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the
default settings for the rear are applied.
When the seat is occupied again, the most re-
cent settings are reapplied.
277
Climate control
CONTROLS
Turning the defrost function on/off
General information
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions
are turned on automatically with the tempera-
ture that was last set.
To activate or deactivate the defrost
function, press the defrost button on
the instrument panel.
The LED of the button is illuminated when the
system is switched on.
Adjusting seat heating
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-
shield and front side windows.
Automatic program
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As
you drive, the heater output is automatically
adjusted according to your set intensity.
Rear window defroster
Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window.
Adjusting seat heating manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
Functional requirement
The rear window heating can be used when
standby or drive-ready state is on.
Turning the rear window defroster
on/off
To turn the rear window heating on/off,
press the rear window heating button
on the instrument panel.
1. Select the icon for seat climate control on
the menu bar, arrow 1.
The LED illuminates when the rear window
heating is turned on.
2.
Tap the seat heating button repeat-
edly until the desired level is selected, ar-
row 2.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Seat heating
Turning the rear automatic climate
control seat heating on/off
Principle
When the seat heating is used, seats are
heated depending on the outside temperature
and the interior temperature.
Tap the icon on the rear climate control
display to set the desired heating out-
put level.
The intensity can be stored using the auto-
matic program. This function can be adjusted
as necessary.
278
Climate control
CONTROLS
The intensity can be stored using the auto-
matic program. This function can be adjusted
as necessary.
Active seat ventilation
Principle
The system cools the seat and backrest as
necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat tempera-
ture.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
Automatic program
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-
matically adjusted according to your set inten-
sity.
Adjusting active seat ventilation
Automatic program
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted
according to the set intensity.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
Adjusting active seat ventilation
manually
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:
1. Select the icon for seat climate control on
the menu bar, arrow 1.
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
2.
Tap the steering wheel heating but-
ton repeatedly until the desired level is se-
lected, arrow 2.
2.
Press the seat ventilation button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Steering wheel heating
Ventilation
Principle
Principle
When the steering wheel heating is used, the
steering wheel is heated depending on the
outside temperature and the interior tempera-
ture.
The ventilation system has different options for
direct or indirect ventilation to optimize air flow
in the vehicle.
279
Climate control
CONTROLS
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
Air quality
General information
The following components improve the air
quality inside the vehicle:
Front ventilation
▷
▷
▷
Emissions-tested vehicle interior.
Interior filter.
Air conditioning system to control the tem-
perature, air flow, and air recirculation.
▷
Pre-ventilation.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
▷
▷
Adjust the air flow from the vent, arrows 1.
Change the air flow direction, arrows 2.
Ventilation in the rear
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.
Knurled wheel for variable opening and
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Pre-ventilation
Principle
Setting the ventilation
Pre-ventilation is used to cool or heat the vehi-
cle interior before beginning a drive. The vehi-
cle interior is ventilated or heated as necessary
using residual engine heat, depending on the
set temperature and ambient temperature.
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
sengers.
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective air conditioning.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
280
Climate control
CONTROLS
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
pre-ventilation:
▷
▷
Set the departure time.
Activate departure times.
Allow for at least 10 minutes between setting
and activating the departure time and depart-
ing at the planned time. This gives the air con-
ditioning sufficient time to prepare the vehicle
interior.
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. System can be used again once
engine is started or after a short drive.
Setting the departure time
The departure time can be set via iDrive:
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.
The ventilation air vents are open.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Switching pre-ventilation on/off
Pre-cooling can be switched on or off via
iDrive:
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select the day of the week, as necessary.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-ventilation"
Activating the departure time
The departure time can be activated via iDrive:
4. Select the desired setting.
Departure time
1.
Tap the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
Principle
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure:
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-ventilation"
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
The system is switched on once.
▷
Departure time with weekday: Time and
day of week can be set.
281
Climate control
CONTROLS
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed
garages.
Display on the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
Icon illuminates: a
departure time is acti-
vated.
Warning
Icon flashes: pre-ven-
tilation is switched
on.
When pre-conditioning is in operation, high
temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials such as
leaves or grass come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materials
can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and
property damage. Make sure that no com-
bustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g.
leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or
other combustible objects.
Activation on the My BMW app
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW
App with remote functionality can be used to
turn on precooling at a preset departure time
or immediately.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
pre-conditioning:
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-
terior to a comfortable temperature prior to
departure. This system automatically cools,
ventilates, and heats depending on the in-
side/outside temperature and set temperature.
Snow and ice may be removed more easily.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
The battery is sufficiently charged.
The tank capacity is sufficient.
The hood is closed.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Time and date are set correctly.
The ventilation air vents are open.
Safety information
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
gine cannot switch on automatically to air-con-
dition the vehicle interior.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
282
Climate control
CONTROLS
Automatic engine start can be enabled via
iDrive:
Press the button on the vehicle key
three times within 1 second.
After operating the vehicle key, it takes
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
To turn off pre-conditioning, press the button
again three times within 1 second.
2.
Tap the settings button.
Turning off with the Start/Stop button
Pre-conditioning can be turned off directly
by pushing the Start/Stop button without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate control"
6. Confirm the legal disclaimer.
Air conditioning for departure time
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
Principle
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture:
General information
The pre-conditioning turns off automatically
after max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The pre-conditioning can only be activated
twice in a row.
Pre-conditioning is turned on once.
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon as
drive-ready state is activated and then deacti-
vated again.
▷
Departure time with weekday: Time and
day of week for the scheduled departure
can be set.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
Switching on via iDrive
▷
▷
Set the departure time.
Activate departure times.
Pre-conditioning can be switched on or off via
iDrive:
Pre-conditioning activates automatically a few
minutes before the set departure time. Pre-
conditioning stays on for a short time after the
set departure time.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
only be activated once for the departure time.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon as
drive-ready state is activated and then deacti-
vated again.
Switching on/off via vehicle key
Pre-conditioning can be turned on/off using
the vehicle key.
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.
283
Climate control
CONTROLS
Setting the departure time
The departure time can be set via iDrive:
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Activation of the pre-conditioning is confirmed
by the light flashing twice.
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
The parking light turns on while the pre-condi-
tioning is on.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select the day of the week, as necessary.
Activating the departure time
The departure time can be activated via iDrive:
1.
Select the Climate menu icon on the
menu bar.
2.
Tap the settings button.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
The activated pre-conditioning
temperature is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to drive.
Icon
Description
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-condi-
tioning is switched on.
284
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Compatibility
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions for the
remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
versal remote control.
Integrated universal remote
control
Additional questions are answered by:
Principle
▷
An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The integrated universal remote control in the
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems.
▷
on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions.
Operating elements on the interior
mirror
The operating elements on the interior mirror
consist of the following elements:
Before selling the vehicle, delete any saved
functions for security purposes.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and
285
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held
transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
LED, arrow 2.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
▷
The LED illuminates green when the
programming is complete.
Hand-held transmitter for remote-control-
led system, arrow 3.
Release the button.
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly when the
hand-held transmitter was detected but
the programming is not complete.
Programming the integrated
universal remote control
Press and hold the button on the interior
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for rolling code
radio systems.
Programming individual buttons
1. To program individual buttons, park the ve-
hicle within range of the remote-controlled
system.
▷
The LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds if the programming could
not be completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. Activate standby state.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
3. Select desired button on interior mirror:
▷
Program an available button:
Press the button.
▷
Program a button that is already in use:
Press and hold the button for approx.
20 seconds.
Refer to information on synchronization in the
operating instructions for the remote-control-
led system.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly
begin flashing orange.
1. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons
on the interior mirror.
2. Locate and press the synchronize button
on the remote-controlled system, e.g., a
garage door.
286
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
step.
Glare shield from the side
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
Folding the sun visor out
To prevent glare from the side window, pro-
ceed as follows:
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
If necessary, repeat this step up to three
times in order to end synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the program-
med function will be carried out.
2. Detach the sun visor from its mount and
swing it toward the side window.
Folding the sun visor in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Operation
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
tem can be operated with the button on the
interior mirror.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
Press and hold the desired button for the re-
mote-controlled system within range until the
function is started.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
illuminated green during the transmission of
the radio signal.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
vidually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green
rapidly.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
All stored button assignments will be deleted.
Sun visor
Safety information
Glare shield
Warning
To protect against glare, fold the sun visor up
or down.
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior while
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Make sure that devices
287
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
and cables are not in the airbag's area of
unfolding.
In the cargo area
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
electrical system. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-
ment.
A socket is provided on the right side of the
cargo area under a cover. Open the cover be-
fore using the socket.
Warning
USB port
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
Principle
The USB port is an interface used to connect
mobile devices to the vehicle via USB cable.
When connected, data can be sent or the mo-
bile device can be charged.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
Front center armrest
Additional information:
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
Safety information
Warning
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
A socket is provided in the front center armrest
under a cover. Pull off the cover before using
the socket.
288
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
BMW Travel & Comfort
System
Front center console
Principle
The BMW Travel & Comfort system provides
mounts for special accessories, e.g., universal
holders for tablets or clothes hangers. The
BMW Travel & Comfort system is located on
the front seat backrests.
For more information, contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Two USB ports are located on the front center
console.
Overview
These USB ports have the following character-
istics:
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷
▷
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
The mounts are located on the front seat back-
rests, behind the marked covers.
Rear center console
Installing optional accessories
1. To attach optional accessories, push the
cover on the front seat backrest all the way
to the side.
Two USB ports are located in the rear center
console.
These USB ports have the following character-
istics:
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
2. When installing optional accessories, refer
to the assembly instructions.
289
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Wireless charging tray
Principle
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly
charge Qi-certified smartphones.
General information
Quick charging functions are supported de-
pending on the smartphone.
1
Storage area
Fan
2
The integrated fan cools the smartphone being
charged.
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,
make sure that there is nothing between the
smartphone to be charged and the wireless
charging tray.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the wireless charging tray:
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-
certified.
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
The charging function is on.
Safety information
The smartphone cannot exceed maximum
dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-
tion correctly when placed together on the
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. When charging
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-
jects on the tray together with the device.
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
Place the smartphone to be charged up-
right in the center of the tray on the driver's
side. The smartphone display is facing up.
Activating/deactivating charging
To activate/deactivate charging, go through
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /
"System settings" / "Wireless charging tray" /
"Wireless charging".
Overview
Tray in the center console:
Inserting a smartphone
Place the smartphone upright in the middle of
the tray on the driver's side, with the display
facing up.
290
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Forgotten warning
Interior camera
General information
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.
Principle
The interior camera can be used to record the
vehicle interior.
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,
the recording function and, if necessary, data
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm
the query on the control display. Additional
activation may be required for some system
functions.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
To activate/deactivate the Forgotten Warning,
go through the menu as follows: Apps menu /
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Wireless
charging tray" / "Mobile phone reminder".
Two infrared light sources next to the camera
lens illuminate while the interior camera is ac-
tive. Infrared light sources may be visible, de-
pending on lighting conditions.
System limits
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
The interior camera can provide the following
functions:
▷
Interior camera.
Media can be recorded, saved, and played.
Remote Inside View.
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray
and smartphone.
▷
The vehicle interior can be recorded using
the My BMW App.
If there are objects between the smart-
phone and wireless charging tray.
▷
Anti-theft recorder.
If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are
located between the smartphone and wire-
less charging tray.
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle
interior is automatically recorded. Record-
ings can also be played using the My BMW
App.
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
Follow applicable legal requirements when us-
ing this system.
Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
Data protection
General information
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,
e.g., holders.
The permissibility of making and evaluating re-
cordings for the interior camera depends on
the applicable regulations of the country in
which the system is to be used. The user is
responsible for the use of the system and com-
pliance with the respective regulations.
By configuring the smartphone settings,
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions
given on the control display and smart-
phone, as applicable.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory
restrictions on using the system in your region
291
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the
laws with respect to use of the system should
be verified in regular intervals, especially when
borders are frequently crossed.
This system analyzes the vehicle interior to
detect which seats are occupied. No media re-
cordings are made in the process.
Overview
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must
be informed about the system. In addition, in-
formation about the system is required when
handing off the vehicle.
Data transfer and data storage
Whether recording data will be sent or stored
depends on the recording function.
The following applies for the interior camera
function:
The interior camera is located in the headliner.
Additional information:
▷
Data is sent to a mobile device. It must be
possible to connect to the vehicle over Wi-
Fi.
Around the headliner, refer to page 35.
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and assigned
to the BMW ID or driver profile.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply for
the interior camera function:
The following applies for Remote Inside View:
▷
Data is sent to mobile devices via the My
BMW App. A connection to the Connected-
Drive account is required.
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.
The camera is activated.
▷
Data is saved to the My BMW App and,
after data is sent, to the mobile device.
When sending recordings to mobile devices,
the following functional requirements apply:
The following applies for the Anti-Theft Re-
corder:
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.
A mobile device is connected to the vehicle
via Wi-Fi.
▷
Data is sent to mobile devices via the My
BMW App. A connection to the Connected-
Drive account is required.
The following functional requirements apply
for the Remote Inside View and Anti-Theft Re-
corder functions:
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and, after data
is sent, to the mobile device.
▷
▷
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.
More information on the scope and content of
data processing is available online in the Con-
nectedDrive privacy notices or service descrip-
tions.
The My BMW App is installed on the mobile
device.
▷
The My BMW App is linked to the Connect-
edDrive account.
Occupying the seats
The interior camera is also used to detect oc-
cupied seats.
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked and locked.
The Anti-Theft Recorder can only be used if
vehicle is equipped with an alarm system.
The interior camera turns on automatically at
regular intervals when all doors are closed.
292
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible
and are not partially or completely covered, for
instance by face masks.
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be
displayed as a preview.
Recording video
Additional information:
Videos can be recorded as follows:
Data protection, refer to page 66.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Camera".
Activating/deactivating interior
camera
The interior camera can record and send data
when activated, then be deactivated.
2. Select the recording mode for video record-
ing.
3. Start the video recording.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Settings".
You can only record video for a certain time.
Displaying and managing
recordings
Saved recordings can be played, sent, and de-
leted in the vehicle.
2. Select the desired setting.
Interior camera
Recording mode
With some national-market versions, record-
ings are only shown on the control display
when the vehicle speed is less than approx.
2 mph/3 km/h for safety reasons.
Recording
mode
Function
"Single
photo"
Shortly after triggering, a
photo will be taken.
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Gallery".
"Smile"
When the system detects a
smile, a picture will be taken.
2. Select the desired recording.
3. Select the desired setting.
Scan the QR code shown on the control dis-
play to send recordings to a mobile device.
The recording is transferred when the pop-up
on the mobile device is opened. The mobile
device must be connected to the vehicle via
WLAN.
"Self-timer
(3 sec.)"
After the timer has expired, a
photo will be taken.
"Burst
mode"
Shortly after triggering, a ser-
ies of pictures will be taken.
Take picture
Settings
A photo can be taken as follows:
1. To configure the settings for the interior
camera, go through the menu as follows:
Apps menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /
"Settings".
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" / "Camera".
2. Select the desired recording mode.
3. Trigger a photo.
2. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the recording mode selected,
photos are taken shortly after being triggered,
when a smile is detected, or when the timer
elapses.
Remote Inside View
With Remote Inside View, recordings of the ve-
hicle interior can be played on a mobile device
293
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
using the My BMW App. The vehicle interior
can be checked, e.g., for forgotten items.
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-
ple or animals left behind.
Anti-theft recorder
The Anti-Theft Recorder automatically records
the vehicle interior when the alarm system is
triggered. The My BMW App issues a notifica-
tion when recordings are being taken. The re-
cording can be shown on a mobile device.
Up to three recordings can be saved to the
vehicle and synchronized with the My BMW
App. If the vehicle is reset to factory settings,
recordings saved to the vehicle are deleted.
294
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Always close storage compartments
immediately after use.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Storage compartments
Principle
Glove compartment
The vehicle has various options for storing or
stowing objects, e.g., the glove compartment
or door storage compartments.
Overview
The glove compartment is located at the bot-
tom of the instrument panel on the front pas-
senger's side.
Safety information
Warning
Opening the glove compartment
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Press the button on the glove compartment.
Open flaps of the storage compartments,
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,
protrude into the interior when folded open
and may be in the way of an airbag that
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or when braking or
Closing the glove compartment
To close the glove compartment, press the
glove compartment lid down until it engages.
295
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
Front center armrest
Overview
A storage compartment is provided in the cen-
ter armrest between the seats.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-
out the integrated key, for example, when the
car is being parked by a parking attendant.
Opening the center armrest
To open the center armrest, proceed as fol-
lows:
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 74.
1. Press the button on the center armrest, ar-
row.
Storage compartments in
the doors
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or
glasses can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Do not use any breakable
objects while driving. Only stow breakable
objects in closed storage compartments.
2. Open the center armrest lid.
Closing the center armrest
To close the center armrest, press the center
armrest lid down until it engages.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Overview
The storage compartments are located in the
doors.
Storage tray in center
console
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
The storage compartments are located in the
center console.
Additional information:
Wireless charging tray, refer to page 290.
296
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
Overview
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
Overview
Two cup holders are provided in the rear cen-
ter armrest.
Coat hooks
Safety information
Warning
The front center console includes two cup
holders.
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. When
suspending clothing articles from the coat
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the
driver's view.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the coat hooks.
Overview
The coat hooks are located on the rear grab
handles in the headliner.
297
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Loading
Principle
When loading the vehicle, items and cargo
must be stowed and secured properly. Do not
exceed the permissible weights and loads.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,
and property damage. Pay attention to the
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle
weight.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs).
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
298
Cargo area
CONTROLS
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
▷
▷
Larger, heavy cargo: Secure with cargo
straps.
Stow particularly heavy cargo as far for-
ward as possible, directly behind and below
the rear seat backrests. When the rear seat
is not occupied, secure each of the outer
seat belts in the opposite buckle.
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Payload
Principle
Lashing eyes are devices used to secure
loads. Depending on vehicle equipment, two
lashing eyes are provided in the cargo area.
General information
To secure cargo, attach suitable devices, e.g.,
lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps,
or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes.
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
Overview
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
To stow and secure cargo, note the following:
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area,
on the side panels and rear panel.
If stowing sufficiently large items in the
cargo area, fold down the rear seat back-
rests completely.
▷
▷
Fasten straps, etc. for securing the load to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Multifunction hook
Small, light-weight cargo: Secure with ten-
sioning/draw straps or with a cargo net.
Principle
Light-weight objects can be hung on the multi-
function hooks in the cargo area.
299
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Safety information
General information
The cargo cover and partition net can be
stowed away.
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo
area must be properly secured.
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the cargo area floor can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during braking
and evasive maneuvers, for example. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
▷
Do not use the cargo area floor to sepa-
rate the cargo area and vehicle interior
in the sense of a luggage net.
Overview
▷
Only use the cargo area floor in the
folded-up position when the rear seat
backrests are folded up and locked.
▷
▷
Fold down the cargo area floor before
driving off.
Always secure cargo against slipping,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for
instance.
A multifunction hook is provided on the right
side of the cargo area.
Fold down the multifunction hook until it audi-
bly engages in the lower position.
NOTICE
The storage space under the cargo area floor
is only suitable for soft objects. Hard objects
may result in damage to the vehicle electrical
system in the event of an accident. There is
a risk of property damage. Only stow soft ob-
jects under the cargo area floor.
Net
Depending on vehicle equipment, a net is pro-
vided on the left or right side of the cargo area.
Smaller items can be stored in the net. To
transport larger objects, slide the net down.
Cargo floor panel
Principle
To stow cargo, a storage compartment is pro-
vided under the cargo area floor. The cargo
area floor can be opened.
300
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Opening the storage compartment
Fold up the cargo floor panel
The cargo area floor can be folded up as fol-
lows:
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
forward.
2. Fold up the cargo area floor if it has been
folded forward.
To open the storage compartment, use the
handle to pull the cargo area floor upward and
fold it forward.
Closing the storage compartment
Fold the cargo area floor back and push it
down.
3. Fold out the cargo area floor holder in order
to hold the cargo area floor in the folded-up
position.
Do not place any weight on the cargo area
floor when folded up. Before folding the cargo
area floor down, fold in the holder.
Enlarging the cargo area
Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
301
Cargo area
CONTROLS
the center section can be folded down sepa-
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts
jammed when folding down the rear seat
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear seat backrest including
head restraint is clear when folding down.
Pull the lever in the recess and fold the rear
seat backrest forward.
Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
Warning
Folding down the center section
To fold down the center section, proceed as
follows:
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Pull down the sliding button to the right of the
head restraint and fold the center section for-
ward.
Cargo cover
Principle
The cargo cover separates the cargo area from
the seat rows and is used to secure cargo. The
cargo cover can be removed.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
To fold in the rear seat backrests, proceed as
follows:
302
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Using the handle, hold the cargo cover firmly
and slowly guide it straight forward. The cargo
cover is retracted.
Safety information
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Closing the cargo cover
Warning
To close the cargo cover, slowly pull the cargo
cover out and straight forward, arrow 1, and
hook it to the holders on both sides, arrows 2.
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be
thrown about the car's interior such as in the
event of an accident or a braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure the cargo cover
is securely engaged in the brackets.
Removing the cargo cover
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug-
gage.
Warning
Body parts can become trapped when the
folding cargo cover is operated. There is a
risk of injury. When operating the folding
cargo cover, make sure that the travel path
of the cover is clear.
Warning
To remove the cargo cover, press the release
button, arrow 1, and pull the cargo cover out
toward the rear, arrow 2.
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can
jam body parts or cause damage. There is a
risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do
not let the cargo cover snap back into place.
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
compartment under the cargo floor panel.
Inserting the cargo cover
To insert the cargo cover, proceed as follows:
Opening the cargo cover
To open the cargo cover, use the handle to pull
the cargo cover back and unhook it from the
holders on both sides.
1. Place the cargo cover on one side of the
side trim panel.
2. Slide the other side forward into the mounts
on the side trim panel.
303
Cargo area
CONTROLS
The cargo cover should engage audibly.
The cargo cover is correctly engaged when
the red marking on the release button is no
longer visible.
3. Repeat this process for the other side of the
cargo cover.
Stowing the cargo cover
The cargo cover can be stowed under the
cargo floor panel.
1. Fold the cargo area floor forward.
2. Slide the cargo cover under the right side
trim panel and place it in the storage com-
partment.
3. Fold the cargo area floor back and push it
down.
304
Cargo area
CONTROLS
305
